JP7142523B2 - slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize according to the display result of a variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

In this type of slot machine, the advantageous state is controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value of 1500 games, the advantageous state is terminated and the advantageous state is reached. A system has been proposed in which information related to controlling an advantageous state, such as the number of remaining games in the state, is also initialized (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 6167349

In the slot machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, when the number of games controlled to be in an advantageous state reaches a limit value, the advantageous state is ended, and information related to control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is provided. will also be initialized, but if it is confirmed that the limit value will be reached by adding the number of remaining games in the advantageous state in the middle of the advantageous state, the added result will be notified In addition, although the advantageous state ends when the limit value is reached, there is a risk of misunderstanding that the advantageous state will continue.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of preventing players from being misunderstood.

The slot machine of means 1 is
Equipped with a variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section;
Numeric value update means for updating a specific numeric value in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section termination means for terminating the advantageous section when a termination condition is satisfied when the specific numerical value reaches a specified number;
Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount in the advantageous section;
a specific state control means capable of controlling a specific state for increasing the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
a specific state control means capable of controlling a specific state for increasing the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
an advantageous amount increasing means for increasing the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
When it is decided that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number as a result of an increase in the advantageous amount, a specification that suggests that the advantageous state will continue until the specified numerical value reaches the specified number. a specific reporting means for reporting;
After the specific notification is made, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect during the period until the specific numerical value reaches a specified number;
with
The specific result notifying means is
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when the specific state ends without it being confirmed that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number, the specific result notification is performed;
When it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific result notification is not executed,
Also when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific notifying means is configured to increase the advantageous amount by the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state. Also when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the amount, the specific notification is performed,
The specific effect executing means, even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount, even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, after the specific notification is made, the time until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number It is characterized in that the specific performance is executed over a period of time.
According to this feature, as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when the specific state ends without it being determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, the increased advantageous amount in the specific state is notified. While the result notification is executed, the specific result notification is not executed when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, so the specific result notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous state will continue even after the specific numerical value reaches the specified number. In addition, even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the increase in the advantageous amount by the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state results in the specific Even when it is determined that the numerical value reaches the specified number, it is possible to make the user recognize that the advantageous state ends when the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in a common flow.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

1 is a front view of a slot machine of an embodiment to which the present invention is applied; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a slot machine; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a game assistance display; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an execution mode of navigation notification and navigation effect; It is a figure for demonstrating a game area. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining section display and internal middle suggestion; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the game assistance display in the error state and the setting confirmation state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the restart order of the section display and the navigation notification when the power supply to the slot machine is restarted after the power supply to the slot machine is stopped while the section display and the navigation notification are being executed; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of main processing performed by a main control unit; It is a flow chart showing the control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the ball output control process which a main control part performs. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of AT state management processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of change in the net increase counter value; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of control of medal payout processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the replay operation process performed by the main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of control of timer interrupt processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display and the like at the start of the section display; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display and the like at the end of the section display; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display and the like at the end of the section display; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a control state regarding AT; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the control flow of the main controller and the sub-controller in the AT state (normal); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the control flow of the main control section and the sub-control section when shifting from the AT state (normal) to the AT state (ED); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the control flow of the main control section and the sub-control section in an additional state; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the control flow of the main control unit and the sub-control unit when shifting from the add-on state to the AT state (ED); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an AT effect (normal) and a navigation effect performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an additional effect performed by a sub-control unit during an AT state (normal); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining overlaid states A to C; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an additional state effect A performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an additional state result notification A performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an additional state effect B performed by a sub-controller; It is a figure for demonstrating the addition state result notification B which a sub-control part performs. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an operation request effect performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an ED transition confirmation suggestion effect performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an AT state effect (ED) performed by a sub-controller; It is a figure for demonstrating the ED production|presentation which a sub-control part performs, and end prior notification. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining post-end notification, AT state result notification, and immersion prevention notification performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the end timing of post-end notification, AT state result notification, and immersion prevention notification performed by a sub-controller; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the flow of an effect when an ED control start condition is satisfied while an AT state effect (normal) is being performed; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects when the condition for starting ED control is not satisfied and the added state effects are terminated; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects when the condition for starting ED control is satisfied while the additional state effects are being performed;

A mode for implementing a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[form]
The slot machine of form 1 is
Equipped with a variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section;
Numeric value updating means for updating specific numerical values (advantage interval game number counter, net increase number counter) in the advantageous interval;
Advantageous section termination means for terminating the advantageous section when termination conditions (advantage section termination condition 1 and termination condition 2) are satisfied when the specific numerical value reaches a specified number;
Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state (AT state) for a period corresponding to the advantageous amount (number of AT games) in the advantageous section;
a specific state control means capable of controlling a specific state (additional states A to C) that increases the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
A specified result report (additional state result reports A to C) capable of executing a specified result report (additional state result reports A to C) for notifying an increased advantageous amount (AT game number) in the specified state when the specified state (additional states A to C) ends. means and
with
The specific result notifying means is
As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount (number of AT games) in the specific state (additional states A to C), the specific numerical value (advantage section game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches the specified number (maximum number of games, specified number) When the specific state ends without confirmation of arrival, the specific result notification (additional state result notification A to C) is executed,
As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount (number of AT games) in the specific state (additional states A to C), the specific numerical value (advantage section game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches the specified number (maximum number of games, specified number) When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games will be reached (when the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, which are conditions for starting the ED control), the specific result notification ( It is characterized by not executing the addition state result notification A to C).
According to this feature, as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when the specific state ends without it being determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, the increased advantageous amount in the specific state is notified. While the result notification is executed, the specific result notification is not executed when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, so the specific result notification is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous state will continue even after the specific numerical value reaches the specified number.

The slot machine of form 2 is the slot machine according to form 1,
As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount (number of AT games) in the specific state (additional states A to C), the specific numerical value (advantage section game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches the specified number (maximum number of games, specified number) When it is determined that the specific numerical value will be reached (when the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter reach the first predetermined value and second predetermined value which are the conditions for starting the ED control), A specific notification means for performing a specific notification (ED shift confirmation suggestion effect) that suggests that the advantageous state (AT state) continues until a specified number is reached;
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (AT state effect (ED confirmation) and ED effect) during a period until the specific numerical value reaches a specified number after the specific notification is performed;
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, the specific notification is given to the user until the specified numerical value reaches the specified number. It is suggested that the state will continue, and after that, the specific effect will be executed during the period until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number. It is possible to clearly recognize that the numerical value is continued until it reaches the specified number and that it is terminated at that point.

The slot machine of form 3 is the slot machine according to form 2,
The specific state includes a plurality of types of specific states (additional states A to C) in which at least one of the production mode or the advantageous amount that can be expected to increase is different,
In any type of specific state, the specific notification means defines the specific numerical value (advantage section game number counter, net increase number counter) as a result of an increase in the advantageous amount (AT game number) in the specific state. When it is determined that the numbers (upper limit number of games, specified number of games) will be reached (advantage zone game number counter, net increase number counter reach the first predetermined value and second predetermined value, which are the conditions for starting ED control) when), perform the specific notification (ED transition confirmation suggestion effect),
In any type of specific state, the specific effect executing means performs the specific effect (AT state effect (ED Confirmation) and ED effect) are performed.
According to this feature, regardless of which type of specific state is controlled, it is possible to recognize that the advantageous state ends when the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in a common flow.

The slot machine of form 4 is the slot machine according to form 2 or 3,
an advantageous state effect execution means for executing an advantageous state effect (AT state effect (normal)) in the advantageous state (AT state);
The specific state includes a plurality of types of specific states (additional state effects A to C) in which at least one of the effect mode or the advantageous amount (the number of AT games) that can be expected to increase is different,
As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state (additional state effects A to C), the advantageous state effect execution means increases the specific numerical value (advantage zone game number counter, net increase number counter) to a specified number (maximum number of games, The specific state ends without it being confirmed that the prescribed number of sheets has been reached, and after the specific result notification (additional state result notification A to C) is executed by the specific result notification means, the type of specific state that ended Regardless, it is characterized by executing a common advantageous state production (AT state production (normal)).
According to this feature, a common advantageous state effect is executed after the end of control regardless of which kind of specific state the control is in, so that it is easy to recognize that the specific state has ended and the state has shifted to the advantageous state. can be made

The slot machine of form 5 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 2 to 4,
A remaining amount display means (AT game number display) capable of displaying the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (AT game number) in the advantageous state (AT state);
The remaining amount display means does not display the remaining amount of the advantageous amount when the specific notification (ED transition confirmation suggestion effect) is performed by the specific notification means, It is characterized by displaying the remaining amount of advantageous amount at the timing when (ED confirmation) and ED effect) are started.
According to this feature, since the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not displayed when the specific notification is performed, the player's awareness of the specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state will continue until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number. can be directed.

The slot machine of form 6 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 2 to 5,
Advantageous amount increasing means (additional lottery) for increasing the advantageous amount (number of AT games) in the advantageous state (AT state),
As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state (additional states A to C), the specific notification means sets the specific numerical value (advantage section game number counter, net increase number counter) to a specified number (maximum number of games, specified number). (When the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, which are conditions for starting the ED control), the advantageous state As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount by the advantageous amount increasing means, it is determined that the specific numerical value (advantage zone game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches a specified number (maximum number of games, specified number). (When the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, which are conditions for starting the ED control), the specific notification (ED transition confirmation suggestion effect) is also performed,
The specific effect executing means, even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount, even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, after the specific notification is made, the time until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number It is characterized by executing the specific effect (AT state effect (ED determination) and ED effect) over a period.
According to this feature, the advantageous amount is increased by the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the prescribed number as a result of the advantageous amount being increased in the specific state. As a result, even when it is decided that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, it is possible to make the player recognize that the advantageous state ends when the specific numerical value reaches the specified number in a common flow. .

The slot machine of form 7 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
A remaining amount display means (AT game number display) capable of displaying the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (AT game number) in the advantageous state (AT state);
The remaining amount display means displays an advantageous remaining amount in the advantageous state, and does not display the advantageous remaining amount in the specific states (additional states A to C).
According to this feature, since the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not displayed in the specific state in which the advantageous amount is increased, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the advantageous amount to be increased in the specific state.

The slot machine of form 8 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Remaining amount display means (AT game number display) capable of displaying the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (AT game number) in the advantageous state (AT state);
End suggesting means for suggesting the end of the advantageous state before the end of the advantageous state (notification of end of AT state, prior notification of end of advantageous section);
with
The end suggesting means, if it is not confirmed that the specific numerical value (advantageous section game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches a specified number (maximum number of games, specified number), the remaining amount display means The end of the advantageous state is suggested by using the display of the remaining advantageous amount by (AT game number display) (AT state end suggestion notification), and it is confirmed that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number In this case, the end of the advantageous state is suggested by using another display without using the display of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount by the remaining amount display means (preliminary notification of the end of the advantageous section).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the advantageous state ends when the specific numerical value reaches the prescribed number, the advantageous amount remains as in the case where the advantageous state ends without the specific numerical value reaching the prescribed number. Since the end of the advantageous state is suggested by using other indications instead of using the indication of the amount, the end of the advantageous state can be suggested without inadvertently provoking the player.

The slot machine of form 9 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
End suggesting means (AT state end suggestion notification, advantageous interval end advance notification) for suggesting the end of the advantageous state (AT state) before the end of the advantageous state (AT state);
The numerical update means is
a first numerical value update means for updating a first numerical value (advantage interval game number) as the specific numerical value in the advantageous interval;
Second value number update means for updating a second numerical value (the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section) as the specific numerical value in the advantageous section;
including
The advantageous interval end means is a first end condition (end condition 1) that is met when the first numerical value (advantage interval game number counter) reaches a first prescribed number (upper limit number of games) in the advantageous interval, or When either one of the second termination conditions (end condition 2) is satisfied when the second numerical value (net increase number counter) reaches the second specified number (specified number), the advantageous section ends. ,
When the first numerical value (advantage zone game number counter) reaches a first predetermined number (first predetermined value) before reaching a first specified number (upper limit number of games), the end suggesting means detects the second number of games. At any time when the numerical value (net increase number counter) reaches the second predetermined number (second predetermined value) before reaching the second predetermined number (prescribed number), it is notified that the termination condition is about to be satisfied. Suggesting the end of the advantageous state by performing a common advance notification (preliminary notification of the end of the advantageous section),
The common advance notification includes both information regarding the first end condition (the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games) and information regarding the second end condition (the number of remaining games up to the specified net increase number). It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first termination condition is established when the first numerical value updated in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, or the second numerical value updated in the advantageous section reaches the second specified number. Even if one of the second end conditions established in (1) is not satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the other is established, so that it is possible to prevent excessive advantage due to being controlled to the advantageous section. Also, when the first numerical value reaches the first predetermined number before reaching the first specified number, and when the second numerical value reaches the second predetermined number before reaching the second specified number, Since the common advance notification that notifies that the end condition is about to be satisfied is executed, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section and the advantageous state from suddenly ending due to the first or second end condition being satisfied. In this case, since the common advance notification includes both information regarding the first termination condition and information regarding the second termination condition, even if the common advance notification It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section, the advantageous section, and the advantageous state will end when the above is established.

The slot machine of form 10 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
After confirming that the specific number (advantage zone game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches a specified number (maximum number of games, specified number) in the advantageous state (AT state), the specified number is the specified number A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect (AT state effect (ED confirmation) and ED effect) during the period until reaching
The specific effect executing means provides information that the specific numerical value has reached a specified number (announcement prior to ED shift, ED suggestion display) and a remaining number until the specific numerical value reaches a specified number (remaining It is characterized by executing a specific effect that informs the number of AT games).
According to this feature, when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the prescribed number, the player is made aware of this fact and the remaining number until the specific numerical value reaches the prescribed number. can be done.

The slot machine of form 11 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 10,
Advantageous result notification means capable of executing advantageous result notification (AT state result notification) for notifying the result in the advantageous state at the end of the advantageous state (AT state);
When the specific numerical value (advantage zone game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 games before) before reaching a specified number (maximum number of games, specified number), the termination condition is satisfied. an end suggesting means for suggesting the end of the advantageous state by performing advance notice of the closeness (advance notice of the end of the advantageous section);
Arrival notification means for performing an arrival notification (announcement after the end of an advantageous section) for notifying that the specific numerical value has reached a specified number in a game in which the specific numerical value has reached a specified number;
with
The arrival notification means is characterized by continuing the arrival notification (notification after the end of the advantageous section) even during the period when the advantageous result notification (AT state result notification) is being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively make the player recognize that the advantageous state has ended when the specific numerical value reaches the specified number.

The slot machine of form 12 is the slot machine according to form 11,
immersion prevention notification means for performing immersion prevention notification (immersion prevention notification) for urging immersion prevention during execution of the advantageous result notification (AT state result notification);
The immersion prevention notification is terminated after a predetermined period of time (3 seconds or more) has elapsed, while the arrival notification (notification after the end of the advantageous section) continues even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.
According to this feature, the immersion prevention notification ends when the predetermined time elapses, while the arrival notification continues even after the predetermined time elapses. It is possible to effectively make the player recognize that the is finished.

The slot machine of form 13 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result;
operation mode notification means capable of performing operation mode notification (navigation notification) for notifying the operation mode of the derivation operation means;
with
The operation mode notification includes a first notification mode (first mode) and a second notification mode (second mode),
The operation mode notifying means is configured such that it is not determined that the specific numerical value (advantage zone game number counter, net increase number counter) reaches a specified number (maximum number of games, specified number) in the advantageous state (AT state). In some cases, the operation mode notification may be performed in the first notification mode or the operation mode notification may be performed in the second notification mode. (when the advantageous section game number counter and the net increase number counter have reached the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, which are conditions for starting the ED control), the first notification mode The operation mode notification is sometimes performed in the second notification mode, but the operation mode notification is not performed in the second notification mode.
According to this feature, before it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, the operation mode notification is specified by selectively using either the first notification mode or the second notification mode as the notification mode of the operation mode notification. It is possible to suggest the possibility of a state and the like.

The slot machine of form 14 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
When it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number as a result of an increase in the advantageous amount (the number of AT games) in the specific state (additional states A to C) (the number of games in the advantageous section When the counter and the net increase number counter reach the first predetermined value and the second predetermined value, which are the conditions for starting the ED control, the specific state is terminated even if the termination condition of the specific state is not satisfied. Characterized by
According to this feature, even though it is confirmed that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific state does not continue unnecessarily. .

An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, comprises a housing 1a with an open front surface and a front door 1b rotatably pivoted on a side end of the housing 1a. there is Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as left reel, middle reel, and right reel) on which a plurality of mutually identifiable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order and in equal numbers are arranged horizontally. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in a see-through window 3 provided approximately in the center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each of them is displayed in the top, middle, and bottom three stages, and arranged so as to be visible from the player's side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of identifiable symbols (“Red 7”, “Blue 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry a”). , "Cherry b", "Bell", "Replay", and "Plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is exemplified, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, or a configuration using four or more reels may be used. . In this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R form a variable display section that variably displays symbols, but the variable display section may be other than the reels. It may be possible to change the pattern by moving the belt on which is arranged. Also, in this embodiment, the variable display section is configured with a physical reel, but the variable display section may be configured with an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, there are a medal inserting section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as gaming value owned by the player). ) is used to set the maximum number of bets among the specified number of bets (in this embodiment, 3) determined according to the gaming state within that range, MAXBET switch 6 is operated as credit Settlement switch 10 operated when settling the stored medals and medals used for setting the bet amount (to return the medals used for setting the credits and the bet amount), and operated when starting the game. A start switch 7 and stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R which are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are provided so as to be operable by the player.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the content of an error is displayed. An error code, operation information (navigation information) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, an advantageous zone display indicating that the advantageous zone is being controlled, etc., the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of bets. 1 BET LED 14 lights to indicate that 1 is set, 2 BET LED 15 lights to indicate that the number of bets is set to 2, 3 BET LED 16 lights to indicate that the number of bets is set to 3, and medals are inserted. An input request LED 17 that notifies the possible state by lighting, a start valid LED 18 that notifies by lighting that the game start operation by operating the start switch 7 is valid, and a wait (because a certain period of time has not passed since the start of the previous game). A game display unit 13 provided with a waiting LED 19 that lights up to notify that the reel is waiting for the start of rotation of the reel, and a replaying LED 20 that lights to notify that the replay game is in progress. is provided. In addition, on the front of the slot machine 1, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying an image or the like and an effect switch 56 are provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the number of bets by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid. Left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) are provided inside the 8R, respectively, to notify by lighting that the operation to stop the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. is provided. Further, inside the effect switch 56, an LED (not shown) is provided for notifying by lighting that the operation by the effect switch 56 is effective.

Inside the slot machine 1, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by operating a predetermined key, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1, and a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by operating a predetermined key, A setting value display 24 that displays a setting value and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 are set to either a hopper tank side or a medal payout port 9 side provided inside the slot machine 1. and a medal selector (not shown) having a passage switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to , and an inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for driving the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R according to the control signal from the main control section 41, and a medal player according to the control signal from the main control section 41 are provided. is provided from the medal pay-out port 9.

Also, inside the slot machine 1, there is a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and normally functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state. A reset/setting switch 38 is provided that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball payout rate) of the internal lottery.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game is controlled by the game control board 40, and the effect is controlled by the effect control board 90 according to the game state. Production control is performed.

The game control board 40 includes the aforementioned MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, checkout switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, reel sensor (not shown) of reel unit 34, hopper A payout sensor and a full tank sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals from these connected switches are input.

In addition, the game control board 40 includes the aforementioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, insertion request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left , middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value indicator 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electric parts are mounted on game control board 40 It is driven under the control of the main control section 41 .

The game control board 40 is equipped with a main control section 41 which is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I/O port 41d, and which performs game control.

The production control board 90 includes production devices such as the aforementioned liquid crystal display 51, speakers 53 and 54 capable of outputting sound, and reel LEDs (not shown) capable of illuminating predetermined positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the rear side. are connected, and the output state of these effect devices can be controlled by a sub-control section 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 . The sub-control section 91 receives commands transmitted from the main control section 41 and performs various controls for effecting. Further, the effect control board 90 is connected to the effect switch 56 described above, and the input state of the effect switch 56 can be detected by the sub-controller 91 .

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. More specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in a lottery such as an internal lottery that affects the degree of advantage for a player. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 decreasing the value in order, lowering the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the degree of advantage decreases stepwise.

In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the slot machine 1 after turning the setting key switch 37 on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on to turn on the power, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset/setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the operation is further performed from the setting value 6, the setting value is changed to 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the displayed value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control section 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. Only the store clerk who has a predetermined key among the store clerk of the installed amusement shop can operate. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the setting key switch 37, even among game store clerks. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires key operation using a predetermined key, so that it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a predetermined key. Also, the reset/setting switch 38 normally functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state.

When a game is played on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the bet amount using credits. When a prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, a predetermined winning line LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, is horizontally aligned in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R). ) is enabled, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. When the maximum number of medals among the specified number corresponding to the game state is exceeded, the amount is added to the credits. Also, in this embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotated and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are continuously varied. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to stop, and the rotation of the reels is stopped. The game is stopped, and the symbols on the relevant reel are derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation is stopped within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (milliseconds) in this embodiment) from when each stop switch is operated. is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and 80 (rotations) x 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 symbols are changed, so the predetermined maximum Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, a maximum of 4 frames worth of symbols can be drawn. In other words, in the stop control, the pattern displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the pattern displayed up to four frames ahead, a total of 5 frames (withdrawal range) are displayed. can be selected and led out to the reels 2L, 2R, and 2R.

As a result, in the stop control, when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by operating the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, a winning combination won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, is selected. If the constituent symbols are within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames ahead from the symbol when the stop switch is operated, the relevant symbol is pulled onto the pay line LN, and the rotation of the reel whose stop switch is operated is stopped. On the other hand, when the symbols constituting the winning combination won by the internal lottery are not within the withdrawal range, the symbols constituting the winning combination not won by the internal lottery are displayed on the winning line LN. In order not to stop upward, it is possible to draw a pattern that does not constitute any winning combination onto the winning line LN, and to stop the rotation of the reel for which the stop switch is operated.

One game ends when all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, and a combination of symbols of a predetermined winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. In this case, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player according to the winning and added to the credits. Also, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when a combination of symbols accompanied by a transition of the game state on the pay line LN stops as a result of the display of the respective reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the game state is shifted to a game state corresponding to the combination of symbols. .

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing the game is started when all the control associated with the end of the previous game is completed, and when all the control associated with the end of the game is completed finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the gaming state, and there is no need to set a small combination involving the payout of medals and the number of bets. There are a replay combination that allows the next game to be started, and a special combination that involves transition to a game state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. In the following, the small combination and the replay combination are collectively referred to as a general combination. In order to generate a prize for each combination determined according to the game state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for the combination. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to allow the winning of each combination before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the predetermined number When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the number of bets set, a random number is used to determine.

Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for the small winning combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of winning combinations allowed by the flag is complete, and becomes invalid in a game in which the combination of winning winning combinations is complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of roles allowed by the flag cannot be arranged, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It's becoming

In addition, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, the order of stop operation, the operation timing), it is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. A winning combination and a replaying combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigable combination) can be won. The navigable role may be, for example, a role in which the stop mode is more advantageous than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, rather than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. , and a winning combination in which, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, the rate of stopping in an advantageous stop mode is higher than in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. In addition, the advantageous stop mode includes not only the stop mode accompanied by awarding of medals, but also the stop mode accompanied by a transition to an advantageous game state, a stop mode in which a transition to a disadvantageous game state is avoided, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes navigation information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the internal lottery, by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT), which is a possible notification period. When the right to be controlled by the AT is granted to the player, the main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT and controls the AT. Then, when the AT is controlled, by winning the navigation target role, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, pressing order, operation timing, etc.) are notified using the game auxiliary display device 12, and a command capable of specifying an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, whereby the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51 or the like is used to execute a navigation effect. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation performance, the navigation target role won by the internal lottery can be surely won.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of medals to be paid out, an error code, and navigation information. Although it is a configuration for notifying navigation information, it may be configured to provide a dedicated display capable of displaying only navigation information, and to notify navigation information using the dedicated display in the control of navigation information.

[About game status]
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 41 can control the game state to be non-internal, internal, or special (BB general, RB). The gaming state is a state in which the types of replay roles to be selected by the internal lottery and the probability of winning the replay role by the internal lottery are common. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a replay combination differs for each game state in non-internal, internal, general BB in a special state, and RB in a special state. The probability of winning is uniform. In addition, the types of replay hands that are subject to lottery by internal lottery in internal are the same as those in non-internal, but the types of replay hands that are subject to lottery in internal lottery in BB general in special state and RB are as follows. Different from the non-internal state, the type of replay combination to be selected by the internal lottery in the general BB in the special state is different from that in the RB.

In the non-internal state, winning of the special role (BB) is not carried over. When the slot machine 1 is started in a state where the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c storing data relating to the game state is initialized, the slot machine 1 is first controlled during non-internal operation. . Also, when the special state ends, it is controlled to be non-internal. Then, during the non-internal period, the special combination (BB) is won by the internal lottery in the game during the non-internal period, and the special combination is lost and is shifted to the internal stage, thereby ending the game. In addition, in a game in which a special role (BB) is won in an internal lottery, the special role (BB) wins and the game is also terminated when the state is shifted to a special state.

It should be noted that a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data relating to the game state is stored is not initialized when the setting change state described above is entered. The game state before the start is taken over. That is, if it was controlled to non-internal before the setting change state started, it continues to be controlled to non-internal after the setting change state ends, and if it was controlled to internal before the setting change state starts. is designed to continue to be controlled internally even after the setting change state ends.

In the non-internal mode, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in the game within a predetermined period, the medal payout rate per game during the period is increased. While exceeding 100%, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. there is As will be described later, the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100% by not announcing an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in the non-internal mode.

Inside, the winning of the special role (BB) is carried over. It is started by winning a special role (BB) in an internal lottery in non-internal.

Internally, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in the game within a predetermined period, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period is increased to 100%. On the other hand, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. While the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% during the period in which the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is reported, the medal payout rate per game is not reported in the period that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not reported. The payout rate does not exceed 100%. In the internal lottery, the probability of winning a small combination in the internal lottery is the same as the probability in the non-internal lottery, while a predetermined replay combination (replay combination 1 in this embodiment) wins in the internal lottery. The probability of doing so is set higher than during the non-internal phase, and the internal phase is in an advantageous state compared to the non-internal phase.

The special state is a game state that is controlled in accordance with the winning of the special role (BB), and is started by the winning of the special role (BB) in the non-internal state, and the establishment of a predetermined end condition (for example, during the special state , the total number of medals to be paid out exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 50). After the end of the special state, it is shifted to the non-internal state.

The special state includes BB general and RB as game states, and during the special state, the game is controlled to one of the game states until the above-described predetermined end condition is satisfied.

In the general BB, the probability of winning a small winning combination in the internal lottery is the same for non-internal and internal winning, but the winning probability of the special combination (RB) is increased. It is started when a special win (BB) wins inside and the game shifts to a special state, or when the RB ends when the conditions for ending the special state are not satisfied. The general BB wins a special role (RB) in an internal lottery, and the symbol combination of the special role (RB) stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, ending the game and shifting to RB.

RB is a state in which the probability of winning a small winning combination in the internal lottery is higher than that of non-internal, internal, and general BB. A special role (RB) is won in an internal lottery during BB general, and the symbol combination of the special role (RB) stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The RB is at least one of the occurrence of winnings a predetermined number of times (eight times in this embodiment) in the RB, or the occurrence of a predetermined number of games (12 games in this embodiment) in the RB. is established, and is transferred to general BB.

In general BBs, the probability of winning a special role (RB) in an internal lottery is set higher than the probability of winning during a non-internal lottery or an internal lottery. In addition, the probability of winning the replay role in the internal lottery is set to 0, and the probability of winning the replay role in the non-internal lottery is assigned to the probability of winning the special role (RB) in the general BB. ing. On the other hand, the probability of winning a small winning combination in the internal lottery during the BB general is set to the same probability as in the non-internal and internal.

In addition, during the BB general mode, small wins are won in the internal lottery with the same probability as in the non-internal mode and the internal mode. It is designed not to be Also, the special combination (RB) that can be won in general BB is a combination for which medals are not paid out as a result of the winning. As a result, the payout rate of medals during general BB does not exceed 100%.

RB is a state in which the probability of winning a small winning combination in an internal lottery is higher than the probability of winning during a non-internal lottery or an internal lottery. In the RB, in the internal lottery, the first small winning combination (this implementation In the example, the RB small and medium winning combination 2) is a second small winning combination (in this embodiment, It is designed to be won with a higher probability (eg, about 3/4) than the winning probability (eg, about 1/4) of the RB small and medium combination 1), and the expectation of the number of medals paid out per game in RB The value (for example, 2.75) is less than the number of medals (for example, 3) used to set the bet amount for one game. Also, as will be described later, the control is not performed in the advantageous section, and an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified. As a result, the payout rate of medals does not exceed 100% during the RB. That is, in general BB and RB, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100%, and the medal payout rate in the special state does not exceed 100%. Also, in general BB and RB, it is not controlled to the advantageous section.

In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special combination (BB) is won with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1/3.4) in the non-internal mode, and shifts to the internal mode, In the internal state, that is, in the state where the winning flag of the special role (BB) is carried over, if it is not controlled by the AT described later, the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%, while the AT When controlled, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

In addition, in the reel stop control, when a special combination and a small combination are won at the same time, control is performed so that the small combination is prioritized. In the small win, the drawing range of the symbols constituting the special win (BB) and the drawing range of the symbols constituting the minor win overlap, and even if any of the small wins is won, the winning line is the winning line. It will stop at LN. Further, when the special combination and the replay combination are won at the same time, control is performed so that the replay combination is always aligned. In other words, when a small winning combination or a replay winning combination is won inside, the special winning combination (BB) is not won.

In addition, since one of the small wins or one of the replay wins is always won inside the inside, the special win (BB) is not won once it is shifted inside the inside. After the transition, the internal contents will be maintained.

In the slot machine 1, most of the games are controlled internally. Whether or not to control the AT internally so that the rate becomes a value determined according to each setting value, specifically, the probability of winning the AT lottery, the probability of winning the navigation lottery, etc., which will be described later. As a result, the payout rate of medals is set according to the set value.

In addition, since the payout rate of medals is set according to the setting value on the premise that it is controlled inside, the payout rate of medals will be as designed if the game state is controlled to other than inside. There is a possibility that it will deviate from the payout rate of , and it is preferable that it is controlled within the inside as much as possible. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the recommended operation mode recommended to the player and the operation mode for winning the special combination (BB) are different so as to facilitate the transition to the internal mode from the non-internal mode. That is, as long as the player performs the stop operation in the recommended operation mode during non-internal play, the special combination (BB) is not won.

In this way, when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived, the main control unit 41 determines the winning of the special combination (BB) as follows. It is possible to carry over after the game.

In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the AT to notify the operation mode (correct order of pressing) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous by the navigation notification while the winning of the special combination (BB) is carried over. It is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the interior.

As will be described later, in the non-internal and internal gaming states, an advantageous interval transition lottery is performed by winning an advantageous interval transition lottery target combination described later in the internal lottery, and the advantageous interval transition lottery is performed. By winning, the game section described later may be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. On the other hand, in the special state among the game states, as will be described later, winning in the advantageous section transition lottery is prevented, and the game section is not shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section.

In addition, the special state is, for example, a state in which the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased by an internal lottery every prescribed number of games, and is shifted in a predetermined case and continues until a predetermined number of games are played. It may be in a state where the probability of winning a small win is increased by an internal lottery every prescribed number of games, or it may be in a state where the probability of winning a small win is increased continuously, or regardless of the random number obtained in the internal lottery. It is a state in which a small winning combination is won, and may be shifted to a predetermined case and ended when one game is played, or the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased by an internal lottery every prescribed number of games. It may also be a state in which the state is shifted to under the condition that a predetermined combination of symbols has been drawn out to the reels, and the state is terminated when one game is played.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to a special state by winning a special prize (BB) in a non-internal state, and in general BB included in the special state, the special prize (BB) is selected by internal lottery. RB) wins and the special role (RB) wins, so that control is made to RB. It may also be possible to control the winning of the winning special role (RB) to the RB.

[Regarding the target roles for the internal lottery]
The internal lottery target combination that is the lottery target in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target combinations. Each internal lottery target combination includes one or a plurality of winning combinations, and when one internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the winning combinations included in the internal lottery target combination are simultaneously won. .

As shown in FIG. 5, the internal lottery target roles include a special winning combination (BB), a special winning combination (RB), a winning small winning combination 1, a small winning winning combination 2, a small winning winning combination 3, a small winning winning combination 4, Push-order small win 5, push-order small win 6 (hereinafter, push-order small wins 1 to 6 may be collectively referred to as push-order small wins), specific small win 1, specific small win 2, RB medium and small win 1, RB small and medium combination 2 and replay combination 1 are included.

The special combination (BB) is a combination accompanied by transition to the above-mentioned special state by winning a prize. The special combination (BB) is subject to an internal lottery when the game state is controlled to non-internal, while when the game state is controlled to internal and special (BB general, RB), Not subject to internal lottery.

A special role (RB) is a role accompanied by a transition to the aforementioned RB due to winning. The special combination (RB) is subject to an internal lottery when the game state is controlled by BB general, while the internal lottery is made when the game state is controlled by non-internal medium, internal medium, BB general and RB. In general BB, the probability of winning a special role (RB) in the internal lottery is when the gaming state is in a state other than general BB (non-internal, internal, RB) The probability is high compared to .

In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to non-internal or internal, the special role (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery, and the game state shifts from non-internal or internal to RB. However, even when the game state is controlled during non-internal or internal, the special bonus (RB) is subject to the internal lottery, and the special bonus is awarded during non-internal and internal. (RB) is won and the symbol combination of the special role (RB) is stopped on the reels, so that the game state can be shifted from non-inside or inside to RB.

The small push-order wins 1 to 6 are obtained by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a predetermined operation mode (operation order in this embodiment) assigned to each small push-order win. Among the winning combinations included in , an increasing combination that pays out more medals than the number of bets is won, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode. Of the prize winning hands included in the pushing order minor hand, a decreasing hand in which the number of medals paid out is equal to or less than the number of bets may win, but none of the winning hands may win a prize. Therefore, when one of the small winning combinations 1 to 6 is won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R are operated in an operation mode corresponding to the type of winning combination. can.

When one of the small winning combinations 1 to 6 is won, the operation mode that allows the player to win an increasing combination among the winning combinations included in the small winning combination, that is, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the small winning combination. In the combination 1, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as left-center-right stop operation). ), and in the push order minor combination 2, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter referred to as left and right). In the pressing order minor combination 3, the operation order is to stop the middle reel 2C first, stop the left reel 2L second, and stop the right reel 2R third. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as middle left and right stop operation), and in the pushing order small combination 4, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped. It is an operation in the order of stopping third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a middle right/left stop operation), and in the pressing order small combination 5, the right reel 2R is stopped first, and the left reel 2L is stopped second. It is an operation in the operation order to stop and stop the middle reel 2C third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as right and left middle stop operation), and in the push order small combination 6, the right reel 2R is stopped first, This is an operation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-center-left stop operation) in which the middle reel 2C is stopped second and the left reel 2L is stopped third.

Push order small wins 1 to 6 are subject to an internal lottery when the game state is controlled to non-internal, internal, or BB general, and are subject to an internal lottery when controlled to any of these game states. are designed to have the same probability of winning. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to RB, the pushing order small wins 1 to 6 are not subject to the internal lottery.

The specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 are combinations with a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than the other internal lottery target combinations. Further, the special small winning combination 1 is a winning combination with a higher probability of winning in the internal lottery than the special small winning combination 2. - 特許庁The specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 are subject to the internal lottery when the game state is controlled to non-internal, internal, or BB general. The lottery has the same probability of winning. Further, the specific small winning combination 1 and the specific small winning combination 2 are not subject to the internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to RB.

The RB medium and small winning combination 1 and the RB small and medium winning combination 2 are not subject to the internal lottery when the gaming state is non-internal, internal, or controlled by BB general, and are internal only when the gaming state is controlled by RB. Subject to lottery.

The RB medium and small combination 1 is a small combination in which a larger number of medals (eight in this embodiment) than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets for one game is paid out upon winning. It is designed to be elected with a probability of about 1/4. On the other hand, the RB medium and small combination 2 is a small combination in which the number of medals (1 in this embodiment) smaller than the number of medals used to set the number of bets for one game is paid out upon winning. You have a 3/4 chance of winning the lottery. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out per game in the RB is 2.75, which is less than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets per game (three in this embodiment). The payout rate of medals inside does not exceed 100%.

The replay combination 1 is subject to an internal lottery regardless of whether the game state is controlled to non-internal or internal, and is in either non-internal or internal. Even when it is controlled, it is designed to win with the same probability in the internal lottery. Also, when the gaming state is BB general or RB, it is not subject to the internal lottery.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled internally, the above-mentioned small wins (push order small wins 1 to 6, specific small win 1, specific small win 2) and The probability of winning the re-playing role (re-playing role 1) is that the increasing hand is won when all the small winning hands 1 to 6 are won, and the winning hand is won when all the specific small wins 1 and 2 are won. net increase in the number of medals (the total number of medals paid out in the predetermined period minus the total number of medals used to set the bet amount in the predetermined period) It is designed so that the average value of the total number of medals obtained per game is a predetermined value (three medals in this embodiment).

In the internal lottery, the special role (BB), the special role (RB), the pushing-order small roles 1 to 6, the RB medium and small role 1, the RB medium and small role 2, and the replay role 1 among the roles targeted for the internal lottery are slot machine 1. There is no difference in the probability of winning according to the set value set in , that is, the probability of winning is uniform regardless of the set value. And the special small winning combination 2 is won with a probability with a difference according to the set value.

The main control unit 41 can perform an advantageous zone lottery for determining whether or not to shift a game zone to an advantageous zone, which will be described later, when a predetermined internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. . Hereinafter, the internal lottery target combination that triggers the advantageous interval lottery may be referred to as the advantageous interval transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous zone transition lottery, regardless of which set value is set, if the winning hands in the internal lottery for the advantageous zone transition lottery are the same, there is a uniform probability that they will be moved to the advantageous zone. An advantageous section transition lottery will be held so that it can be determined.

Of the internal lottery target roles, the pressing-order small wins 1 to 6, the specific small win 1, the specific small win 2, and the replaying win 1 are the advantageous section shift lottery target wins. These advantageous section transition lottery target combinations are designed to be won with the same probability in the internal lottery when the game state is controlled to either non-internal or internal game state. Advantageous zone shift lottery is performed with the win probability of the internal lottery not changing when the control is either non-internal or internal.

In addition, a combination that is not an internal lottery combination (in the embodiment, a special combination (BB), a special combination (RB), a small RB combination 1, and a small RB combination 2), and a game state of non-internal medium or internal medium The advantageous section transition lottery is not performed with the combination of which the probability of winning in the internal lottery changes depending on which one of the control is performed.

Triggered by the fact that a predetermined internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 conducts an AT lottery for determining whether or not to control to the aforementioned AT. Hereinafter, the internal lottery target combination that triggers the AT lottery may be referred to as the AT lottery target combination.

Of the internal lottery target roles, pushing-order small wins 1 to 6, specific small win 1, specific small win 2, and replay win 1 are AT lottery target wins. An AT lottery is performed by winning one of these AT lottery target combinations in an internal lottery when the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section. In the AT lottery, regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, when the AT lottery target winning combination in the internal lottery is the same combination, it is decided to control to the AT with a uniform probability. A lottery will be held so that the lottery will be held.

In addition, in the AT lottery that is triggered by the winning of the specific small winning combination 1 or the specific small winning combination 2 in the internal lottery, the winning of any of the pushing order small winning combinations 1 to 6 and the replay winning combination 1 is triggered. A decision to control the AT is made with a higher probability than when the AT is used. In addition, in the AT lottery that is triggered by the winning of the specific minor winning combination 1, the decision to control to the AT is made with a higher probability than when the winning of the specified minor winning combination 2 is triggered. It's like

It should be noted that the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery target combination in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and the winning of the advantageous zone transition lottery target combination is a trigger. In the advantageous section transition lottery to be performed, a lottery may be performed with a probability with a difference according to the set value, so that the transition to the advantageous section may be determined with a probability with a difference depending on the set value. In addition, the probability of winning an AT lottery target role in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery is performed when the AT lottery target role is won. In this case, a lottery may be performed with different probabilities depending on the set values, so that the AT control may be determined with different probabilities depending on the set values. In addition, the probability of winning an AT lottery target combination in the internal lottery is a probability that varies depending on the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery is performed when the AT lottery target combination is won. In this case, a lottery may be performed with different probabilities depending on the set values, so that the AT control may be determined with different probabilities depending on the set values.

In addition, in this embodiment, a combination won in the internal lottery has a different probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the setting value set in the slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as a set difference combination). Regardless of whether it is a combination with no difference (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a combination with no set difference), the advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is performed when the winning combination is won. However, when the winning hand in the internal lottery is a hand with a set difference, an advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is performed, and when it is a hand with no set difference, an advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is performed. Alternatively, one of the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT lottery may be set by the internal lottery, and the other of the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT lottery may be set by the internal lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which winning of a no difference combination is used as a trigger.

[Regarding the configuration of the game auxiliary display]
The configuration of the game auxiliary display device 12 included in the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the auxiliary game display device 12 consists of two display devices 12L and 12R that can turn on/off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and each segment can be turned on. It is a display. By controlling the predetermined segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode, predetermined numbers (“0” to “9”), symbols (eg, “-”, “.”, etc.), alphabetic characters (eg, “E ”, etc.) are displayed in one or two digits to indicate the number of medals to be paid out (not shown), the fact that control is being performed in an advantageous section (see FIG. 6(b)), and the type of error that has occurred. It is possible to display an identifiable error code (see, for example, FIG. 10(a)), a navigation number (see FIG. 7) as navigation information notified by navigation notification, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section, and when a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied (for example, after the start of the advantageous section, the first navigation notification Over the notification period from the start of the game where the payout rate (number of payouts/number of bets) can exceed 100%) to when a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section ends) , By controlling the eighth segment (hereinafter sometimes referred to as section display LED 12a) of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 to the lighting state, it is notified that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section. Section display is possible.

[About navigation notifications and navigation effects]
Navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the game auxiliary display 12 and navigation effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 controls the AT, and when an internal lottery wins a navigation target role (in this embodiment, a small combination of pushing order 1 to 6), the navigation notification is executed, and Displaying a navigation number that can specify an advantageous operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R (in this embodiment, may be referred to as the order of operation, hereinafter referred to as the order of pressing the correct answer) on the auxiliary game display 12. , it is possible to inform the player of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 7, navigation information includes left-center-right navigation, left-right-center navigation, center-left-right navigation, center-right-left navigation, right-left-center navigation, and right-center-left navigation. In the left-center-right navigation, by displaying the navigation number "1-" on the game auxiliary display 12, it is notified that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the left-center-right stop operation. In left-right center navigation, the navigation number "2-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the left-right center stop operation. In the center left/right navigation, the navigation number "3-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the center left/right stop operation. In the center right/left navigation, the navigation number "4-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the center right/left stop operation. In the right/left center navigation, the navigation number "5-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the right/left center stop operation. In the right-center-left navigation, the navigation number "6-" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the right-center-left stop operation.

Further, after the section display LED 12a starts the section display indicating that the section display LED 12a is controlled to the advantageous section as described above, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 12a to continuously light up. When performing navigation notification during execution of the section display, the navigation number notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 while continuously controlling the section display LED 12a to be lit. to control.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the navigation notification, as an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous for the player, the operation order (correct pressing order) is notified. The structure may suggest the operation timings of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player, or the structure that suggests the combination of the operation order and the operation timings of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is a predetermined operation timing for a predetermined reel, the image of the pattern corresponding to the predetermined operation timing is displayed on the predetermined reel on the liquid crystal display 51. It is possible to suggest the operation mode by displaying it at a position to be displayed.

When performing navigation notification, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a command capable of specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a navigation effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 a navigation image suggesting the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R specified based on the command. . The navigation image includes number images "1" to "3" suggesting the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and symbol images suggesting that the stop operation is performed at the timing when the predetermined symbol is displayed on the reel. , reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the navigation effect, for example, when a left-center-right stop operation is notified by navigation notification, a navigation image (in this embodiment, corresponding to the left reel 2L) suggesting the left-center-right stop operation is displayed. The number image "1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the number image "1" is displayed on the position corresponding to the middle reel 2C, and the number image "123" is displayed on the position corresponding to the right reel 2R. display. In addition, when the left/right middle stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, when the middle left/right stop operation is notified, when the middle right/left stop operation is notified, when the right/left middle stop operation is notified, and when the right/center left stop operation is notified is notified, the navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest the corresponding operation mode.

[About the game section]
As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control the game section to be either a normal section or an advantageous section.

The normal section is a game section in which navigation announcements are not performed, and after the advantageous section ends, the next game starts, and it is decided by the advantageous section transition lottery that the transition to the advantageous section will be made. is terminated by being In the normal section, the above-described section display is not performed, and the section display LED 12a is controlled to be turned off.

In addition, in the normal section, if the above-mentioned gaming state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery target combination (push order small combination 1 to 6, When the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the replay winning combination 1) are won, an advantageous zone shift lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone.

The probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery object combination in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery object combination. In the advantageous zone transition lottery, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone with different probabilities depending on the set values set in the slot machine 1 based on a predetermined advantageous zone transition lottery table. It is possible. In addition, in the advantageous zone transition lottery, regardless of the controlled game state (non-internal, internal), based on the lottery result of the internal lottery, it is possible to decide to move to the advantageous zone with a uniform probability. It has become.

In addition, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the probability of determining that the game state is to be shifted to the advantageous zone when the game state is BB general in the special state, that is, the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery is set to 0. In general, even if the winning combination for the advantageous interval transition lottery is won, it is not decided to move to the advantageous interval by the advantageous interval transition lottery, and the transition to the advantageous interval is not made. Incidentally, when the game state is the special state, even if the advantageous zone transition lottery target combination is won, the advantageous zone transition lottery may not be performed, so that the transition to the advantageous zone may not be performed.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to the special state RB, the advantageous zone transition lottery is not selected in the internal lottery as described above and won, so the advantageous zone transition lottery is performed. There is no transition to the advantageous section. That is, when it is controlled to the special state (BB general and RB), it is designed not to shift to the advantageous section.

In addition, in the normal section, the AT lottery is not performed even if the above-mentioned AT lottery target role is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether the game state is controlled to be non-internal or internal. , AT does not make a decision to control, and is not controlled by AT. In addition, in the AT lottery during the normal section, the probability of winning the AT control may be set to 0, so that the AT control may not be determined.

It should be noted that the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery target combination in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and is based on the winning of the advantageous zone transition lottery target combination. The lottery for shifting to the advantageous interval may also be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous interval with a uniform probability regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加In addition, the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery object combination in the internal lottery differs depending on the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and the advantageous period transition lottery object combination is won based on the winning. In the section transition lottery, regardless of the setting value set in the slot machine 1, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability. In addition, the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery object combination in the internal lottery differs depending on the setting value set in the slot machine 1, and the advantageous period transition lottery object combination is won based on the winning. In the section transition lottery, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a different probability depending on the setting value set in the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加

The advantageous section is a game section in which the navigation notification may be performed, and is a game section that is more advantageous than the normal section because the navigation notification can be executed. The advantageous section is started when the next game is started after it is decided to move to the advantageous section by the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section, and ends when the predetermined advantageous section end condition is satisfied. . In the advantageous section, the above-mentioned section display is started at the start of the game in which the medal payout rate (number of medals paid out/number of bets) can exceed 100% by first performing navigation notification after the start of the advantageous section. By controlling the section display LED 12a to be in a lighting state, it is notified that the advantageous section is being controlled. Further, in the advantageous section, when a predetermined navigation condition is established (in this embodiment, the AT state is controlled to be described later, and the navigation target role is won in an internal lottery), the navigation notification is performed. , the operating modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player are reported.

Also, in the advantageous section, when the above-described gaming state is controlled internally, an AT lottery is performed by winning an AT lottery target combination in an internal lottery. By winning the AT lottery, the player is then shifted to an AT state in which the AT is controlled. Then, when the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, navigation notification is performed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player is notified. , the game section is more advantageous for the player than the normal section.

In the advantageous section, when the game state is controlled to be non-internal, the AT lottery is not performed even if the AT lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the AT is not controlled. It's like Further, in the advantageous section, even if the aforementioned advantageous section transition lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed.

The conditions for ending the advantageous section include the ending condition 1, which is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. is the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (maximum number of payouts in slot machine 1 (15) is subtracted from the upper limit number of 2400, and the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet amount is added) End condition 2 that is satisfied by exceeding the value)), the end condition that can be satisfied regardless of the number of games in the advantageous section and the number of net increases in medals, and is a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, in the game It includes an end condition 3 that is satisfied when the controlled game state is non-internal) is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended when at least one of the end conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied. .

In this embodiment, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed by winning the advantageous section transition lottery target combination in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. By winning, the game section is shifted to the advantageous section, but when the game section is controlled to the normal section, by winning a predetermined advantageous section transition combination, the game section is changed to the advantageous section. It may be configured to shift to .

In this way, the main control unit 41 can control the advantageous section in both the non-internal period in which the winning of the special bonus (BB) is not carried over and the internal period in which the winning of the special bonus (BB) is carried over. is. The termination condition of the advantageous section in the inner section is that at least either termination condition 1 or termination condition 2 is satisfied, while the termination condition of the advantageous section in the non-internal section is that the termination condition 3 is satisfied, In this configuration, the conditions for ending the advantageous section in the inside are different from the conditions for ending the advantageous section in the non-inside. As a result, in a structure in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate during the internal stages and the payout rate of medals is inappropriate during the non-internal stages, conditions for ending the advantageous section in the internal stages and the determination of the advantageous section in the non-internal stages are Since the termination conditions and are different, appropriate control can be performed depending on whether the internal state is in progress or the non-internal state.

Further, the main control unit 41 is configured not to control to the advantageous section in general BB. As a result, the advantageous section is not controlled in the general BB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, so that unnecessary control of the advantageous section in the general BB can be avoided.

Further, the main control unit 41 is configured not to control the RB to the advantageous section. As a result, the RB where the medal payout rate is not appropriate is not controlled to the advantageous section, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB can be avoided.

[Regarding section display and internal suggestions]
The production during preparation performed by the sub-controller 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG. 9(a).

As described above, the main control unit 41 wins the special prize (BB) in the internal lottery, but the pressing operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation in the game ends (the stop switch is released). And, when the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not stopped on the reels, and the winning special combination (BB) is carried over without winning. If this is the case, the game state is shifted from non-inside to inside at the end of the game, and the next game is controlled from the start of the inside to inside.

In addition, the main control unit 41 is capable of transmitting to the sub-control unit 91 a command capable of specifying the game state being controlled according to the progress of the game. A command capable of specifying the current game state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 . In addition, a command capable of specifying the currently controlled game state, game section, and AT control state at a predetermined timing in each game (in this embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game). It is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . In addition, at a predetermined timing in each game (in this embodiment, when the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed and the game is completed by stopping all the reels), in the next game It transmits to the sub-controller 91 a command capable of specifying the control state regarding the game state, game section, and AT to be controlled. In addition, when the RAM clear is performed to initialize the storage area including the predetermined area in which the data related to the game state is stored in the RAM 41c, a command capable of specifying that the RAM clear is performed is sent to the sub-controller 91. to be sent.

On the other hand, the sub-control section 91 can use the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform a preparation-in-progress effect suggesting that the game state controlled by the main control section 41 side is non-internal. is.

As shown in FIG. 9( a ), the sub control unit 91 detects that the main control unit 41 side will clear the RAM based on the command received from the main control unit 41 , and then the game state is changed to When it is specified that the slot machine 1 has not yet been transferred to the internal state and is being controlled in the non-internal state, or when the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory, etc., the storage means (eg, RAM, etc.) of the sub-controller 91 After being started in the initialized state, when it is specified that the game state is not yet controlled to the internal state and is being controlled to the non-internal state on the side of the main control part 41, the production during preparation. control to do

In the preparation-in-progress effect, a preparation-in-progress screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a text image of "preparing") and a non-internal suggestive image (in this embodiment, an image of a star) are displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51, and when it is specified that the game state is non-internal, by displaying the in-preparation screen and non-internal suggesting image on the liquid crystal display 51, it is possible to indicate that the game is in preparation. When it is specified that the game state is in a non-internal state and that the game state is controlled in a non-internal state, and the game state is not in a non-internal state but in a special state, the non-internal state suggesting image is not displayed. , by displaying only the in-preparation image, it is suggested that the game is in preparation and that the game state is controlled to a special state.

When it is specified that the game state has shifted to the inside based on the command received from the main control unit 41 in the state where the effect during preparation is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, that is, a special prize is awarded by the internal lottery. (BB) wins, but at the end of the game in which the winning of the special role (BB) is lost, the display of the preparation screen and the non-internal medium suggestive image on the liquid crystal display 51 is terminated, and preparation preparation production is performed. is terminated, and the normal effect is started on the liquid crystal display 51.例文帳に追加In the normal effect, the liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display a normal effect screen (in this embodiment, an image showing a character walking around town) to be displayed in a non-AT state in which AT control is not performed, which will be described later. , to perform an effect according to the progress of the game. By shifting from the preparing effect to the normal effect, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 side has shifted the game state to the internal state, that is, to the normal state where the payout rate of medals is as designed (hereinafter referred to as It is sometimes called internal suggestion).

On the other hand, when it is specified that the game state has shifted to the special state instead of the internal state based on the command received from the main control unit 41 while the preparation effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, That is, when the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery, and when the game in which the special role (BB) wins ends, the display of the non-internal suggestion image is terminated while the preparation screen is continued to be displayed, Control is performed so as to continue the presentation during preparation. When it is specified that the special state has ended and the transition to the non-internal state is made based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the display of the non-internal state suggestive image is controlled to resume. After that, until it is specified that the game state has shifted to the inside, control is performed to continue the production during preparation.

As described above, the main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section, wins the AT lottery in the game in the advantageous section, and shifts to the AT state. is established, the interval display is started. As described above, in the non-internal mode, the transition is made to the advantageous section, but since the advantageous section ends when the end condition 3 is satisfied in the first game of the advantageous section, the section is displayed in the non-internal advantageous section. is satisfied and the section is not displayed. In addition, in order to satisfy the conditions for starting the section display, at least two games (a game in which an AT lottery is performed and a game in which the navigation target role is won) are required after the transition to the advantageous section. , even if the transition is made to the advantageous section, the section display is not performed because the section display start condition is satisfied. That is, when the effect mode on the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub-control unit 91 is shifted from the effect during preparation to the normal effect, indicating that the game state has shifted to the inside, the interval display is performed. Instead, the section display LED 12a is maintained in the off state (see FIG. 9(a)).

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 terminates the effect during preparation performed when being controlled during non-internal mode when the transition is made from non-internal mode to internal mode, while starting the normal effect and performing internal control. By controlling to perform the normal production without performing the production during preparation when it is controlled during, the production during preparation is completed and the normal production is started. This is a configuration for executing an internal medium suggestion that suggests that the content has been moved to the internal medium. As a result, when the transition from the non-internal mode to the internal mode is performed, the sub-control unit 91 executes the suggestion of the internal mode. It is possible to identify the

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 terminates the preparation-in-preparation presentation at the end of the game in which the game state has shifted from non-internal to internal, thereby displaying an internal-indicating suggestion indicating that the game state has shifted to internal-in on the liquid crystal display. 51 can be used. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can display a section using the section display LED 12a at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section has shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. In this configuration, the position at which the internal middle suggestion is executed and the position at which the section display is executed are different, and the timing at which the internal middle suggestion is executed and the timing at which the section display is executed are different. As a result, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding between the suggestion that the inside is inside by the inside middle suggestion and the suggestion that the transition to the advantageous section is made by the section display.

In addition, the sub-control section 91 can cause the liquid crystal display 51 to display a preparation-in-progress screen and a non-internal medium-indicating image in the preparation-in-progress effect, and the game state controlled by the main control section 41 side is When it is in the non-internal state, the main control unit displays a preparation screen and a non-internal state suggesting image to indicate that the game is in the state of preparation and that the game state is being controlled in the non-internal state. When the game state controlled by the side 41 is not in the non-internal state but in the special state, the non-internal suggestive image is not displayed, and only the preparation image is displayed, whereby the game is in the state of preparation. , and suggests that the game state is controlled to a special state. As a result, after it is specified that the RAM is cleared on the side of the main control unit 41, it is specified that the game state has not yet shifted to the internal state and is being controlled to the non-internal state. , when the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory, etc., in a situation where a game is played at the amusement arcade side until the medal payout rate reaches an appropriate internal state, whether the internal state is non-internal state before becoming the internal state or the internal state. It can be made to recognize whether it is a special state before becoming. In addition, in such a situation, by displaying the preparation screen and the non-internal indication image by the preparation production, a predetermined special operation mode (even if the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery, the special role (BB) (BB) is difficult to win a prize), it can be suggested that the payout rate of medals can be set to an appropriate level. Further, in such a situation, by not displaying the non-inside suggesting image by the effect during preparation, it is possible to suggest that there is no need to play the game in the special operation mode until the special state ends.

In addition, the main control unit 41 can shift to an AT state in which navigation notification is performed when the control is being performed internally and in the advantageous section, and after shifting to the advantageous section, the navigation notification is performed first. By controlling to display an interval in the game, it is possible to display an interval when it is controlled to an advantageous interval in the internal, but when it is controlled to an advantageous interval in the non-internal, the interval is displayed. This is a non-executable configuration. As a result, while the medal payout rate is appropriate during the internal period, while the medal payout rate is inappropriate during the non-internal period, the internal area where the medal payout rate is appropriate is controlled to an advantageous section. In this case, the interval display can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is not appropriate, and if it is controlled to the advantageous interval, the interval display is not performed, so the medal payout rate is appropriate. Unnecessary section display is not performed in a situation where a game is played on the amusement center side until it reaches the middle.

It should be noted that the preparation-in-progress effect should indicate that at least the main control unit 41 side has not moved to the inside where the payout rate of medals is appropriate, and only the preparation-in-progress screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, the internal middle suggestion can indicate that the game state has changed from non-internal middle to internal middle at least in the situation where the game is played at the amusement arcade until the medal payout rate reaches the proper internal middle. It suffices if it is a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51, or an effect of controlling a specific LED to a lighting state during the period controlled internally by the main control unit 41 side , outputting a specific sound from the speakers 53 and 54, etc.), the specific effect may not be performed during the period when it is controlled during non-internal, or during the period when it is controlled during non-internal. While the specific effect is performed, the specific effect may not be performed during the period during which the internal control is performed. Moreover, in these configurations, the specific effect may be performed during one game, or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in the situation where the game is played at the amusement arcade until it reaches internal in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate. be.

In addition, the internal middle suggestion can indicate that the game state has changed from non-internal middle to internal middle at least in the situation where the game is played at the amusement arcade until the medal payout rate reaches the proper internal middle. If the main control unit 41 side is controlled during non-internal operation at startup, the sub-control unit 91 performs a non-internal operation display effect during non-internal operation, After shifting to the inside of the inside, even if it shifts to the inside of the non-inside again, the non-inside display effect may not be performed. With such a configuration, after the state of playing a game at the amusement arcade ends until the payout rate of medals reaches an appropriate level, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary internal indications.

Further, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the internal suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub-controller 91, but the main control section 41 may be configured to perform the internal suggestion. As a configuration for the main control unit 41 to suggest the inside, for example, the main control unit 41 has an LED indicator that suggests that the inside is not inside or inside, and when the LED indicator is not inside On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the transition to the inside is made by controlling to the lighted state when it is in the internal state, or to turn off the LED indicator when it is not in the internal state. A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the interior state is indicated by controlling to the lighting state while the interior state is being controlled, while controlling to the lighting state during the interior. In addition, in a configuration in which the main control unit 41 is provided with an LED indicator indicating that the user is not inside or inside, the LED indicator may be used as an indicator for indicating other than indicating inside (for example, credit display). segment for displaying "." in the device 11, etc.), or a configuration provided with a dedicated display (for example, an LED display) that performs only internal indications.

Next, the section display performed by the main control unit 41 using the section display LED 12a, the navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12, and the AT determination notification performed by the sub-control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51, AT effect will be described with reference to FIG. 9(b).

As shown in FIG. 9B, the main control unit 41 performs an AT lottery when the game state is controlled internally and the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, and the AT lottery is performed. By winning the lottery, the player is then shifted to the AT state in which the AT is controlled. Then, after shifting to the AT state, it is the time to start the game in which the navigation target role is first won in the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L and 8C are operated after the start switch 7 for starting the game is operated. , the section display is started during the period before the operation of 8R is validated, and after the section display LED 12a is started to be lit, the navigation information is executed and the game auxiliary display 12 is made to display the navigation number. to control.

In addition, when the AT lottery is won, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a command indicating that the AT lottery has been won and a command capable of specifying the timing of shifting to the AT state. Also, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . Further, when the navigation notification is performed, a command capable of specifying the operation mode to be notified by the navigation notification is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

In response to this, the sub-control unit 91 provides an AT determination notification that notifies that the main control unit 41 side has confirmed that AT control is performed, an AT effect that suggests that the AT state is being controlled, It is possible to use the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform a navigation effect that suggests the operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

As shown in FIG. 9B, when it is specified that the AT lottery was won based on the command received from the main control part 41, the sub-control part 91 specifies that the AT lottery has been won. At a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, at the end of the game one game before the start of the AT state) during the period from when the AT lottery is won to the transition to the AT state, the AT is confirmed. Notify. In the AT confirmation notification, an AT confirmation notification screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a text image of "AT confirmed!!") is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the AT is controlled by the main control unit 41 side. Notify that it has been confirmed that

Then, at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, at the start of the game in which the AT state is started (the game is When the start switch 7 is operated for starting)), the normal performance is shifted to the AT performance. In the AT production, by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 an AT production screen in a production mode different from the normal production (in this embodiment, an image showing a character flying in outer space), the main control unit 41 side can This suggests that it is controlled to the AT state.

After that, when it is specified that the navigation notification is to be performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, a navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification (for example, a navigation image suggesting a middle left stop operation is displayed) An image (see FIG. 7)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, suggesting an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player.

In this way, the main control unit 41, after being internally controlled, shifts to the advantageous section and then to the AT state, and starts the section display at the start of the game when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. By controlling the section display LED 12a to light up, it is notified that the section has been shifted to the advantageous section. On the other hand, the sub-control section 91 is capable of performing the preparation-in-preparation effect on the liquid crystal display 51 when the game state is controlled to be non-internal by the main control section 41 side, and performs the preparation-in-preparation effect. At the end of the game in which the game state is shifted from non-internal to internal, the effect mode on the liquid crystal display 51 is changed from preparation-in-preparation to normal effect, whereby the game state is changed from non-internal to internal. It is designed to suggest that it has been moved inside.

That is, while the liquid crystal display 51 indicates that the game state has shifted to the inside, the section display LED 12a (game auxiliary display 12) indicates that the game state has shifted to the advantageous section. Suggestion to the effect that it has shifted to the inside and suggestion to the effect that it has shifted to the advantageous section are made in different places (indicators). In addition, the suggestion that the gaming state has shifted to the internal mode is made at the end of the game in which the special winning (BB) was won in the internal lottery in the non-internal mode, whereas the fact that the game state has shifted to the advantageous section This suggestion is made at the start of the game when the conditions for starting the section display are met. It is done at different times.

[Regarding section display during error status and setting confirmation status]
Section display during the error state and during the setting confirmation state will be described with reference to FIG.

In the control of the section display, the main control unit 41 does not turn off the section display LED 12a during the notification period in which the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, and continuously controls the section display LED 12a to be in the lighting state. When displaying the number of medals to be paid out, an error code, a navigation number, etc. on the game auxiliary display device 12 during the period, the section display LED 12a (the right display device 12R 8th segment) are both controlled to the lighting state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the main control unit 41 can control an error state that disables the progress of the game when an error occurrence is detected in the slot machine 1. When the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section and the section display LED 12a is controlled to be lit, if the error state is controlled based on the detection of the occurrence of an error, even during the error state While continuously controlling the section display LED 12a to be lit, another segment of the auxiliary game display 12 is used to display an error code capable of identifying the type of error that has occurred. When the error state is canceled by a predetermined operation, the error state is terminated and the display of the error code is terminated. Even after the error state is ended, the section display LED 12a is continuously controlled to light up until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied following the control of the error state.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 is in a normal state where the main control unit 41 side is not controlled to an error state or a setting confirmation state described later, the sub-control unit 91 generates an effect image according to the control state related to the game section and AT described later. For example, when the control state related to AT described later is a non-AT state, a normal effect screen (in this embodiment, an image showing a character walking around town) that is mainly displayed in the non-AT state is displayed. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 51 to perform an effect according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, during the period in which the main control unit 41 detects the occurrence of an error and is controlled in the error state, the main control unit 41 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 is controlling in the advantageous section. An error screen (in this embodiment, an image of a character and an error code ) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that the control is in an error state.

In this way, when the main control unit 41 makes a transition to an error state that disables the progress of the game while controlling the advantageous section and controlling the section display LED 12a to light up, the game assistance An error code that can specify the error state is displayed on the display 12, and the section display LED 12a is controlled to be kept lit. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is being controlled and that it is being controlled in the advantageous section. In addition, the player can be made to recognize the state of the gaming machine before being shifted to the error state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display an error code when an error state occurs while controlling the advantageous section and controlling the section display LED 12a to light up. At the same time, while controlling to maintain the section display LED 12a in the lighting state, the sub-control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 side is being controlled in the advantageous section, and the error code and information about the error (For example, the cancellation method, etc.) is controlled by using the liquid crystal display 51 and the like, so that the effect by the liquid crystal display 51 and the like is performed in a state where the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that control is being performed in an advantageous section in which the game can be played based on the content.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the main control unit 41 detects that the setting key switch 37 is turned on by operating a predetermined key while the game is not being played. The setting confirmation state is entered to disable the progress of the game, and the setting value indicator 24 is controlled to display the setting value currently set in the slot machine 1. After that, the setting key is operated by a predetermined key operation. It is possible to end the setting confirmation state by detecting an operation to turn off the switch 37, control the game section to be an advantageous section, and control the section display LED 12a to be lit. In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the section display LED 12a is continuously controlled to light up even in the setting confirmation state, and the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 24 (not shown). do. Even after the setting confirmation state is ended, the section display LED 12a is continuously controlled to be lit until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied before shifting to the setting confirmation state.

On the other hand, the sub-control section 91 displays the normal effect screen (in this embodiment, An image showing a character strolling through the city) is displayed on a liquid crystal display 51 to perform an effect according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, during the period when the main control unit 41 is controlling the setting confirmation state, the main control unit 41 side does not suggest that the main control unit 41 side is controlling to the advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 side controls the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation state screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image indicating that the setting confirmation state is in effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to control the setting confirmation state. Control to suggest the effect.

In this way, the main control unit 41 disables the progress of the game when the advantageous section is controlled and the section display LED 12a is controlled to be lit, and the currently set value indicator 24 is displayed. When the transition is made to the setting confirmation state in which the set value is displayed, control is performed so that the section display LED 12a is maintained in the lighting state, so that the advantageous section is controlled based on the display contents of the game auxiliary display 12. The player can be made to recognize the effect. Also, the player can be made aware of the state of the gaming machine before shifting to the setting confirmation state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts to the setting confirmation state while controlling the advantageous section and controlling the section display LED 12a to be lit, the set value display 24 (not shown) displays While displaying the setting value and controlling to maintain the section display LED 12a in the lighting state, the sub-control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 side is controlling to the advantageous section, and confirms the setting. The liquid crystal display 51 or the like is used to indicate the current state. As a result, while the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side, it is erroneously recognized that the game is being controlled in an advantageous zone where the game can be played, based on the content of the effect on the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. You can prevent it from happening.

[Regarding the restart order of section display and navigation notification when power is restored]
After a power outage that stops power supply to the slot machine 1, the order of restarting section display, navigation notification, etc. when recovering from the power outage will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power supply of AC 100V is stopped, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes a power interruption process (not shown) in the timer interrupt process, and the registers and the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 before the power interruption. The data set in the predetermined area of the slot machine 1 is saved in the storage area of the RAM 41c backed up by the backup power supply, and the data is held by supplying the backup power supply. When the power supply to is resumed, it is possible to return to the control state before the power failure. In particular, in the control state before the power outage, whether or not the navigation notification was performed, if the navigation notification was performed, the content of the navigation notification, whether or not the control was in an advantageous section, and whether the stop operation was effective can be identified.

In addition, when the power supply of AC 100V is stopped, the sub-control part 91 executes the power-off process in the same manner as the main control part 41, so that the control state of each effect device before the power supply is stopped. is held in storage means backed up by a backup power source, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, each performance device can be returned to the control state before the power cutoff. . In particular, in the control state before the power supply is stopped, it is possible to specify whether or not the navigation effect was performed on the liquid crystal display 51, and if the navigation effect was performed, the contents of the navigation effect can be specified.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the main control unit 41 is controlling the advantageous section and the AT is being controlled, and the internal lottery wins the navigation target role, the section display LED 12a lights up. The navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 while the navigation information is performed. Further, when the rotation of at least one reel is controlled after the start of the game, the stop effective LED of the reel concerned is controlled to be lit. Further, at this time, on the side of the sub-controller 91 , a navigation effect is performed, and a navigation image suggesting an operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

In this state, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and power failure occurs, as shown in FIG. 22R and liquid crystal display 51 are all turned off, and reels 2L, 2C and 2R are all stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11(c), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the main control unit 41 first controls the (not shown), the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and then timer interrupt processing is performed. , the display of the operation mode of the stop switch and the lighting control of the section display LED 12a by the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 are restarted at the same time, and the navigation notification and the section display are restarted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11(d), the main control unit 41 causes all the reels whose rotation control is resumed to rotate at a constant speed, so that the stop switch corresponding to the reel whose rotation is being controlled is turned on. Lighting control of the stop effective LED is restarted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11(e), the main control unit 41 resumes reel rotation control, navigation notification, section display, and lighting control of the stop effective LED. By specifying that the return process has ended, the sub-control unit 91 resumes the control of the navigation effect, and displays a navigation image suggesting the operation mode notified by the navigation notification on the liquid crystal display 51. restart.

As a result, the control states of the section display LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop enable LED, the reels, and the liquid crystal display 51 are restored to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped.

Thus, when the navigation notification and the navigation effect are being performed in the advantageous section, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted, thereby changing the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect. When returning to the state before the power supply was stopped, the main control unit 41 controls to restart lighting of the section display LED 12a and display of navigation information on the game auxiliary display 12 at the same time. As a result, before the section display by the section display LED 12a resumes, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 is restarted, and the navigation notification is given even though the section display does not notify that it is an advantageous section. can be prevented from being restarted.

In this embodiment, when the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is returned to the state before the power supply was stopped in the advantageous section, the section display LED 12a lights up and the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation notification. Although it is configured to resume at the same time, it may be configured to resume display of navigation information on the game auxiliary display 12 after restarting lighting of the section display LED 12a. Even in such a configuration, the section display by the section display LED 12a is restarted. It is possible to prevent the navigation notification from being restarted by the game auxiliary display device 12 before it is displayed.

Control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19. FIG.

[About main processing]
The main control unit 41 is activated when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and executes various processes according to programs stored in the ROM 41b. After starting, the main processing is executed after initializing the internal register of the main control unit 41, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a predetermined output port, and the like by executing the setting processing at the time of start-up. The main process is a process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of game.

The control contents of the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described below with reference to FIG. 12 .

As shown in FIG. 12, in the main process, first, a later-described game start waiting process (Sa1) for waiting until a game is started is executed. Thereafter, when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery is executed (Sa2).

In the internal lottery process, based on the internal lottery random number value latched when the start switch 7 is operated in step Sa1, whether to allow the winning of each lottery target combination that is the lottery target of the internal lottery ( That is, a process of determining whether or not to allow the derivation of a predetermined display result is performed. Then, a winning number that can specify which lottery target combination (including losing) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A winning combination number is assigned to each lottery target combination in advance. If the lottery target combination is also desired to be won, that is, in the case of a loss, 0 is set as the winning number.

After executing the internal lottery process in the step of Sa2, the later-described ball output control process for performing the process related to the game section is executed (Sa3). After that, a reel control process for controlling the rotation and stopping of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is executed (Sa4).

In the reel control process, when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to rotate at a predetermined rotational speed, and then the stop switches 8L, 8C, Control is performed to stop the relevant reel according to the operation of 8R. In addition, the reel control process ends when the stop control for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is completed and the stop switch associated with the third stop operation is released (when the stop switch depression operation is completed). be done.

Further, in the reel control process, after the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate, all the reels rotate at a constant speed, thereby controlling the left/middle/right/stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R to light up. do. After that, by operating the stop switch for the rotating reel, the stop effective LED of the corresponding stop switch is controlled to be extinguished.

Further, in the reel control process, after stopping the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the combinations of symbols forming the winning combination on the pay line LN are stopped as the display results of the respective reels 2L, 2C and 2R. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. Then, when a winning has occurred, a winning flag capable of specifying the winning combination in which the winning has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After executing the reel control process in step Sa4, an AT state management process, which will be described later, is executed to perform a process related to the end of the advantageous section (Sa5). After that, a medal payout process, which will be described later, is executed (Sa6), in which a process relating to the payout of medals is carried out according to the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a result of the game. After that, when a replay combination is won, a replay operation time process, which will be described later, is executed to perform a process of awarding a replay (Sa7).

After executing the replay operation processing in step Sa7, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous interval flag can be set by the ball output control processing in step Sa3 is referred to (Sa8), and the advantageous interval flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is set (Sa9).

If it is determined in step Sa9 that the advantageous section flag is not set, the state control data (light-off) for controlling the lighting mode of the section display LED 12a to the light-off state is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the main CPU 41a accumulator register, etc.) (Sa10), and the state control data (extinguishing) of the predetermined register is read into the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 among the output buffers provided for each output port in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sa11). Then, a one-time interrupt waiting process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is performed once (Sa12). After controlling the eighth segment, that is, the section display LED 12a to be turned off, the process proceeds to step Sa13. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the flag in the advantageous section has been set, the process advances to step Sa13 without performing the processing of steps Sa10 to Sa12.

If the one-time interrupt waiting process is performed in step Sa12, or if it is determined that the flag during the advantageous section is set in step Sa9, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized upon completion of the game. A game end time setting process for setting is executed (Sa13). In the game end setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that stores data used only for the game (for example, data indicating the winning result of a general role in an internal lottery) is set as an initialization target. In addition, when a special role is won in the game and the control of the special state is started, or when the control of the special state is ended, data related to the special state (for example, data indicating the type of special state or A predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data for counting the number of medals to be paid out in the special state) is stored is set as an object to be initialized. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c set as the object to be initialized is initialized at the start of the next game by the above-described game start waiting process.

After executing the game end setting process in step Sa13, the process returns to step Sa1, and steps Sa1 to Sa13 are repeated. When the main process completes one unit of game control, the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

In the main process, a predetermined command is generated according to the progress of the game, set in the command queue, and the process of transmitting the command to the sub-controller 91 is appropriately executed.

In addition, in the main processing of the present embodiment, if the advantageous interval flag is not set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, each time a game in which the advantageous interval flag is not set ends, Although it is configured to perform processing for setting the state control data (lights out), when the advantageous section flag is not set and the section display LED 12a is in the lighting state, the section display LED output buffer shows the state A configuration in which control data (turning off) is set may also be used. In such a configuration, only when the advantageous section flag is not set and the section display LED 12a is in the lighting state, the state control data (light off) is set in the section display LED output buffer, Processing for turning off the section display LED 12a can be performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

In this way, in the main process, when the advantageous section flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the state While setting the control data (lighting) and controlling the lighting mode of the section display LED 12a to the lighting state, if the advantageous section flag is not set, the state control data is stored in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a (lights off) and control the lighting mode of the section display LED 12a to the lighted state, navigation notification is performed first after the start of the advantageous section, and the payout rate (number of payouts/number of bets) reaches 100%. Over the period from the start of a game that can be surpassed to the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends, the section display LED 12a is controlled to light up to inform that the advantageous section is being controlled.

In addition, in the main process, after executing the predetermined processes including the game start waiting process and the reel control process, if the advantageous interval flag is not set, the status control data (turned off) is stored in the output buffer of the interval display LED 12a. is set, and the lighting mode of the section display LED 12a is controlled to be in the off state. The reel control process is terminated when the third stop operation is terminated (the stop switch associated with the third stop operation is released), and after the third stop operation is terminated, the section The display LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. Then, after the section display LED 12a is controlled to be turned off, the game end setting process is executed, and the main process is completed by returning to the game start waiting process of the first step. That is, in the main process, control is performed to switch the lighting state of the section display LED 12a to the off state within a period from the end of the third stop operation in the current game to the start of the game start waiting process for the next game. It can be done.

Further, in the main process, after the internal lottery process is performed, while the reel control process is being performed, the ball output control process is performed, and control is performed in an advantageous section. State control data (lighting) is set in the display LED output buffer, and the section display LED 12a is controlled to light up. After the start switch 7 for stopping the reels is operated and before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for stopping the reels becomes effective, the section display LED 12a starts lighting, and the section display LED 12a It is designed to notify that it is controlled in the advantageous section.

Further, in the main process, after the reel control process and the regame operation process are performed, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. state control data (light off) is set in the section display LED output buffer to turn off the section display LED 12a. At the end of the game in which at least one of condition 2 and end condition 3 is satisfied, the section display LED 12a is extinguished to indicate that the advantageous section has ended.

[Regarding game start waiting process]
The control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 .

As shown in FIG. 13, in the game start waiting process, first, a replay medal counter value set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into a predetermined register, and the replay medal counter is initialized and set to 0. (Sb1). In the replay medal counter, a new game is started when a replay winning combination is won in the previous game and a replay is granted by the replay activation processing in the main processing relating to the previous game. A numerical value (3 in this embodiment) corresponding to the prescribed number of bets required for the game is set. On the other hand, when the replay was not given in the previous game, the value (0) when initialized in the step Sb1 is maintained.

Then, it is determined whether or not the replay medal counter value is greater than 0 based on the value read into the predetermined register in step Sb1 (Sb2). Then, if it is determined in step Sb2 that the value of the replay medal counter is greater than 0, that is, if a replay was granted in the previous game, medal insertion execution processing is performed (Sb3).

In the medal insertion execution process, in step Sb1, the replay medal counter value read into the predetermined register is set as the number of bets, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are set to be lit, and the specified number (in this embodiment, , and 3) to notify that the number of bets has been set. When setting the bet amount, in step Sb1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the predetermined register into which the replay medal counter value is read, and 1 is added to the bet amount, and 1 to 1 corresponding to the added bet amount is added. After setting the 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state, the process of controlling the corresponding 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed until the replay medal counter value becomes 0, When the value of the medal counter for replay becomes 0, the process of setting the number of bets is finished. It has become so. By adding the replay medal counter value to the number of bets at once, setting all the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state, and controlling the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state by LED dynamic display processing. , all of the 1st to 3rd BETLEDs 14 to 16 may be controlled to light up at the same time by one timer interrupt process.

After performing the medal insertion execution process in step Sb3, the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed (Sb4). Further, if it is determined in step Sb2 that the replay medal counter value is not greater than 0, that is, if replay is not given in the previous game, the process of step Sb3 is not executed, and step Sb4 is performed. , and perform medal maintenance permission setting processing.

In the medal maintenance permission setting process, the credit value set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and if the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) and there is space in the credit, and the value of the set bet amount, and if the value of the bet amount does not reach the specified number (3 in this embodiment) and there is an empty bet amount, the token from the medal insertion unit 4 A medal maintenance permission flag indicating permission to insert medals is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, in the medal maintenance permission setting process, regardless of whether or not replay is granted, if there is a vacant credit, the medal maintenance permission flag is set. If is given, even if there is space in credits, the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, if there is space in the number of bets, or if there is space in credits and replay is not granted , a medal maintenance permission flag may be set.

After the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed in step Sb4, the process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Sb5). By performing the one-interrupt waiting process, the timer interrupt process is performed and the detection state of various switches, the lighting state of LEDs, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection state of these various switches is updated. In this state, subsequent processing (for example, medal detection processing, operation input reception processing, etc., which will be described later) can be performed.

After the one-time interrupt waiting process is performed in step Sb5 and the timer interrupt is performed once, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the medal maintenance permission flag can be set by the medal maintenance permission setting process described above is referred to, and the medals are collected. It is determined whether or not the maintenance permission flag is set (Sb6).

If it is determined in step Sb6 that the medal cleaning permission flag is set, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state (energized state) (Sb7). By setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to ON state, the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion part 4 is switched to the hopper tank side, and the medals are controlled to be taken into the inside of the slot machine 1.例文帳に追加Further, the lighting mode of the insertion request LED 17 is set to the lighting state (Sb8), and control is performed to notify that the medal can be inserted. After setting the lighting mode of the input request LED 17 to the lighting state, the timer interrupt processing is executed and the LED dynamic display processing is performed, thereby controlling the input request LED 17 to be in the lighting state.

Then, after setting the insertion request LED 17 to the lighting state in step Sb8, medal detection processing is performed (Sb9). Also, if it is determined in step Sb6 that the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the processing in steps Sb7 and Sb8 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step Sb9 to perform medal detection processing.

In the medal detection process, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the transition of the output signal of the inserted medal sensor 31 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal inserted signal) and the transition of the medal inserted signal. A medal insertion state is determined based on the transition of the insertion signal. Then, when the insertion of normal medals is detected, processing for setting the number of bets and accepting medals as credits is performed. On the other hand, when an abnormal insertion of medals is detected, error processing is performed to control an error state that disables the progress of the game. The error state is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or reset/setting switch 38 . It should be noted that, when the error state is canceled, if the abnormality that caused the error state to be controlled (for example, medal jamming within the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31, etc.) is not resolved, It will be controlled to the error state.

After the medal detection processing is performed in step Sb9, the operation input reception processing for receiving the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the reception of the operation of various switches and performing the operation of the switch whose operation is enabled. (Sb10).

In the operation input reception process, if the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more while the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is accepted. Activate. Further, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, and the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number, acceptance of operation by the start switch 7 is validated. Further, when medals are not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, acceptance of operations by the adjustment switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

In the operation input acceptance process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. After that, by setting the channel switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state (non-energized state), the channel of the medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the medal payout port 9 side, and the inserted medals are sent to the player. control to return to Further, when the operation of the setting key switch 37 is detected while the operation of the setting key switch 37 is valid, the setting value display processing for displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected while the operation of the settlement switch 10 is valid, the settlement processing of returning the medals stored in the credit to the player is performed. In addition, when the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected while the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, the number of medals up to the prescribed number is set as the bet amount within the possible range based on the credits. A process of subtracting the set number of medals from the credit is performed. After performing a process corresponding to the switch or the like whose operation has been detected, the operation input acceptance process is ended.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in step Sb10, it is determined whether or not a valid operation of the start switch 7 has been detected based on the start flag (Sb11). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the effective operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process advances to step Sb12 to perform start effective LED display processing for controlling the lighting mode of the start effective LED 18. (Sb12).

In the start valid LED display process, the start valid LED 18 is turned on when the operation of the switch other than the reset switch 23 is not detected in a state in which the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled by the operation input reception process of step Sb10. When the operation of a switch other than the reset switch 23 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled while the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled. If not, the start enable LED 18 is set to be off. As a result, when the operation of the start switch 7 is valid and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to light up. It notifies that the operation by is valid. In addition, when the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state, but when a switch other than the reset switch 23 is being operated, or when the operation by the start switch 7 is not set to be valid, the start is valid. By controlling the LED 18 to turn off, it is notified that the operation of the start switch 7 is invalid.

After performing the valid start LED display process in step Sb12, the process returns to step Sb5, and the processes of steps Sb5 to Sb12 are repeated until it is determined in step Sb11 that a valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected. conduct. After performing the start valid LED display processing in step Sb12, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to the lighting mode set by the start valid LED display processing by performing the one-interrupt wait processing in step Sb5. becomes.

In step Sb11, when it is determined that a start flag is set in a predetermined register and a valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected, a random number for internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42 and stored in the RAM 41c. Set in the area (Sb13). After that, the start enable LED 18 and the insertion request LED 17 are set to the extinguished state (Sb14, Sb15), the medal maintenance permission flag is cleared from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb16), and the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared. (Sb17) to terminate the game start waiting process and return to the main process.

After that, in the main process, an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery using the internal lottery random number acquired in step Sb13, and reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in response to detection of operation of the start switch 7. One game is started by carrying out reel control processing and the like for starting rotation and stopping the relevant reels in response to detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As described above, in the game start waiting process, when a replay is granted, the medal insertion execution process is executed, the number of bets for performing a replay is set, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are lit. sequentially controlled.

In addition, in the game start waiting process, when the medal maintenance permission flag is set and at least one of the credits or the number of bets is vacant and the medals can be inserted, the medals inserted from the medal inserting unit 4 flow. The flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in the ON state so as to switch the path to the hopper tank side, and the lighting mode of the input request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

Further, in the game start waiting process, by performing the start valid LED display process, when the operation by the start switch 7 is valid and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, While the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be lit, the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, but the switch other than the reset switch 23 is operated, or the operation by the start switch 7 is valid. is not set, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be turned off.

In addition, in the game start waiting process, when a valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected by the operation input reception process, the insertion request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are set to the off state, and the number of payouts displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. is cleared, and then the timer interrupt processing is performed, so that the insertion request LED 17 and the start enable LED 18 are controlled to be turned off, and the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased. Become.

In addition, in the game start waiting process, after performing the medal insertion execution process (Sb3), it is possible to perform the process (Sb8) of setting the lighting state of the insertion request LED 17. , the number of bets is set as a replay is awarded, and after the 1st to 3rd bet LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled to light up, the insertion request LED 17 is controlled to light up.

In addition, in the game start waiting process, in a series of processes (Sb6 to Sb12) after the one-interrupt waiting process (Sb5), a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the input request LED 17 is performed, and then the start is enabled. Since the LED display processing (Sb12) can be performed, the processing for setting the lighting state of the input request LED 17 (Sb8) and the start valid LED display processing (Sb12) are performed. The request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 can be controlled to be lit at the same time.

[Regarding ball output control processing]
The control contents of the ball-out control process performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 .

As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout ball control process, first, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to acquire section information capable of specifying the currently controlled game section (Sc1). The initial value of the section information is a value indicating that the currently controlled game section is a normal section. It can be updated to the indicated value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section based on the section information acquired in step Sc1 (Sc2). When it is determined in step Sc2 that the currently controlled game section is not an advantageous section, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referenced to determine which internal lottery target combination (including losing) has been won in the internal lottery. An identifiable winning number is acquired (Sc3), and it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery target combination for performing an advantageous zone transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous zone has been won (Sc4). A combination number is assigned in advance to each internal lottery target combination that is subject to a lottery in the internal lottery. It is Based on whether or not the combination number of the internal lottery target combination specified based on the winning number is within a predetermined range, it is possible to determine whether or not the advantageous section transition lottery target combination has been won. ing.

Then, when it is determined in the step of Sc4 that the advantageous zone transition lottery target combination has been won, an advantageous zone transition lottery process for performing an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed (Sc5). After that, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the transfer to the advantageous section is decided (Sc6). If it is determined in the step of Sc6 that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won, the data for updating the section information (advantageous section) is acquired in a predetermined register (Sc7), and the update data acquired in the predetermined register ( Advantageous section) is used to update the section information to a value indicating the advantageous section (Sc8). As a result, based on the interval information (value indicating the advantageous interval) updated in the game, the advantageous interval starts from the next game of the current game, and the next game is regarded as the first game of the advantageous interval. A number counter counts the number of games in the advantageous section.

Then, an advantageous interval start time setting process for setting an advantageous interval to be started upon winning the advantageous interval transition lottery is performed (Sc9). In the advantageous interval start time setting process, the initial setting of the end condition (arbitrary end condition, etc.) of the advantageous interval to be started according to the type of winning combination for transition to the advantageous interval lottery, and the processing performed during the advantageous interval. A process of setting a lottery table used for an AT lottery, a process of setting various counters used in an advantageous section, and the like are performed.

Then, after the advantageous interval start time setting process is performed in step Sc9, the ball output control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, in step Sc4, if it is determined that the advantageous zone transition lottery target role has not been won based on the winning number, and if it is determined that the advantageous zone transition lottery has not been won in step Sc6, Sc5 to Without performing each process of step Sc9, the ball output control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the currently controlled game section is the advantageous section in step Sc2, the number of games continuously controlled in the advantageous section (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the number of games in the advantageous section) is counted. After adding 1 to the advantage zone game number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for counting (Sc10), the ball output status information set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (the control status of the currently controlled AT based on the information that can identify the currently controlled ball payout state (control state related to AT) is acquired in a predetermined register (Sc11), and then a process related to the currently controlled ball payout state is executed. A ball-out status related process is performed (Sc12).

In the paid-out state related processing, processing related to the paid-out state acquired in the predetermined register at the start of the processing, that is, the currently-controlled state of paid-out balls is performed. The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control non-AT state, premonitory state, AT state, and additional states A to C as a ball payout state (control state related to AT). When the transition condition is satisfied, the current control state is terminated and controlled to transition to the control state according to the satisfied transition condition. In addition, various processes are performed according to the currently controlled ball output state.

In addition, in the ball output state related processing, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal in each game. 3) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to indicate that the condition 3) is established, and control is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, when the game section is shifted to the advantageous section while the gaming state is controlled to be non-internal, the next game of the game shifted to the advantageous section, that is, one of the advantageous sections in the non-internal Control is performed so that the advantageous section is ended on the first game.

In addition, in the ball output state related processing, as will be described later, the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, and when the section display start condition for starting the section display described above is satisfied (in this embodiment, the transition to the advantageous section After that, it is first controlled to the AT state, and in the AT state, the navigation target role is first won by internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed by AT control, that is, after the start of the advantageous section, first At the start of a game where navigation notification is performed and the payout rate (number of payouts/number of bets) can exceed 100%, an advantageous section flag indicating that the section display is to be started is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, It controls to start the control of the section display by the section display LED 12a.

After performing the ball payout state-related processing in step Sc12, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the arbitrary end condition establishment flag can be set by the ball payout state-related processing is referred to, and whether the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is set. Based on whether or not, it is determined whether or not the optional termination condition is satisfied (Sc13). If it is determined that the arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag is set and the arbitrary end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed (Sc14), and the advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be ended is set. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

Then, after the advantageous interval end flag setting process is performed in step Sc14, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous interval flag can be set by the ball output state related processing is referenced to determine whether the advantageous interval flag is set. It is determined whether or not (Sc15). Further, in step Sc13, if it is determined that the arbitrary termination condition fulfillment flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the processing in step Sc14 is not performed, and the processing proceeds to step Sc15, where the advantageous section flag is set (Sc15).

Then, in step Sc15, when it is determined that the advantageous section flag is set, the state control data (lighting) for controlling the display mode of the section display LED 12a to the lighting state is read into a predetermined register ( Sc16), after setting the state control data (lighting) of the predetermined register in the section display LED output buffer (Sc17), the one-time interrupt waiting process is performed (Sc18), and the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. By the LED dynamic display processing, the display mode of the eighth segment, that is, the section display LED 12a on the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be lit. After that, an instruction setting process for setting navigation information is performed (Sc19). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc15 that the flag in the advantageous section is not set, the processing in steps Sc16 to Sc18 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step Sc19 to perform instruction setting processing (Sc19).

In the instruction setting process, when it is specified that the AT control state (ball payout state) is controlled to the AT state, the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, and the navigation lottery win is specified. Execution of navigation notification according to the navigation target role, and game auxiliary display of operation modes (for example, pressing order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous for the player according to the navigation target role. The device 12 is used to make a notification, and control is performed so that a command capable of specifying the operation mode is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . On the other hand, when the AT control state is not controlled to the AT state, the stop switches 8L, 8C, which are advantageous to the player, do not perform the navigation notification even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery. Control is performed so that a command that can specify the operation mode of the 8R is not transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

Then, after performing the instruction setting process in the step of Sc19, the ball output control process is finished and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the ball output control process, control is performed in an advantageous section, and when a predetermined section display start condition is satisfied, the state control data (lighting) is set in the section display LED output buffer, and the section Since the display mode of the display LED 12a is controlled to be in a lighting state, the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started at the start of the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied, and the fact that the section display LED 12a is controlled to the advantageous section is notified. can do.

In addition, in the ball output control process, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, 1 is always added to the advantageous section game number counter for each game to count the number of games played during the advantageous section. As a result, in the AT state management process to be described later, it is determined that the number of games played during the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) based on the advantageous interval game number counter. In this case, the advantageous interval is controlled to end, so the advantageous interval does not exceed the upper limit number of games, and it is possible to prevent the medal payout rate from becoming excessive in the long term.

In addition, in the ball output control process of the present embodiment, when the section display start condition is satisfied, that is, after the start of the advantageous section, navigation notification is first performed, and the payout rate (number of payouts/number of bets) exceeds 100%. At the start of the game to be played, the section display LED 12a is configured to start the section display, but the section display is the first navigation notification after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. It is also possible to start at a predetermined timing in the period until the game in which the payout rate (number of payouts/number of bets) can exceed 100%. A configuration in which the section display is started, a configuration in which the section display is started by playing a predetermined number of games after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the game section is changed from the normal section to the advantageous section. After shifting to the advantageous section, the section display may be started by stopping a predetermined combination of symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

In addition, in the ball output control process of the present embodiment, the display of the section is started at the start of the game where the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous section and the payout rate (number of payouts/number of bets) can exceed 100%. , and ends at the end of the advantageous interval. ) may be terminated once.

In the ball output control process, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous interval. By determining and controlling to end the advantageous interval at the end of the game, when the advantageous interval is controlled in the non-internal mode, the advantageous interval is ended in the game in which the advantageous interval has started. As a result, in a configuration in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate during the internal period and the payout rate of medals is inappropriate during the non-internal period, when the advantageous section is controlled during the non-internal period, the advantageous section Since the advantageous interval is ended in the started game, even if the arcade is controlled to the advantageous interval until the payout rate of medals reaches an appropriate level, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game. When the advantageous section ends, the game is not played by the player while the state is shifted to the advantageous section, i.e., the advantageous state on the amusement arcade side, so that the fairness is impaired when the player plays the game. You can prevent it from falling off.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the advantageous interval when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit as the termination condition of the advantageous interval. In such a configuration, if the advantageous interval is controlled in the non-internal middle, if the advantageous interval is not ended in the game in which the advantageous interval has started, the advantageous interval transferred in the non-internal middle will be transferred to the internal middle. will continue after the transition. In addition, in the advantageous section shifted to the non-internal area, the number of games that can be played in the internal area before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is less than that in the advantageous section shifted to the internal area. The amount is reduced by the number of games played inside, and if a player plays a game in an advantageous section shifted to non-inside, fairness is lost. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous interval is controlled in the non-internal mode, the advantageous interval ends in the game in which the advantageous interval started, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. Even if the advantageous section is controlled in the situation where the game is played on the amusement center side until the inside becomes inside, the advantageous section ends before the player starts the game, and the fairness is impaired when the player plays the game. It is designed to prevent it from falling off.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal in each game during the advantageous interval. If the advantageous interval is controlled in the non-internal mode, the advantageous interval ends in the game in which the advantageous interval started, but the advantageous interval ends in the game in which the advantageous interval started. For example, only in the first game of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal, and if it is determined that it is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. A configuration or the like that performs control so as to end the section may be used.

[About AT state management processing]
The control contents of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 .

As shown in FIG. 15, in the AT state management process, section information set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is first obtained in a predetermined register (Sd1). Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section based on the section information (Sd2).

Then, when it is determined in step Sd2 that the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag can be set by the above-described ball output control process is referred to, and the advantageous section is determined. It is determined whether or not the end flag is set (Sd3). If it is determined in step Sd3 that the advantageous interval end flag has not been set, the advantageous interval game number counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and updated in the above-described ball output control process, is referred to ( Sd4), it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) based on the counter for the number of games in the advantageous interval (Sd5).

If it is determined in step Sd5 that the number of games in the advantageous interval has not reached the upper limit, the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous interval is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A net increase number counter for counting the number of medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the number of bets in the advantageous section from the total number of issued medals (Sd6), and the net increase number counter value is obtained. is acquired in a predetermined register as a net increase in the number of sheets. Then, the payout number value of medals to be paid out is specified based on the winning flag of the game, and the payout number value is added to the net increase number value of the predetermined register (Sd7). After that, the bet value set in the game is specified, and a new net increase number value is calculated by subtracting the bet value from the net increase number value in the predetermined register (Sd8). Then, it is determined whether or not the new net increase number value calculated in the predetermined register is 0 or more (Sd9).

If it is determined in step Sd9 that the net increase number of sheets in the predetermined register is not equal to or greater than 0, the net increase in number of sheets in the predetermined register is set to 0 (Sd10), and then the process proceeds to step Sd11. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd9 that the net increase number in the predetermined register is 0 or more, the process in step Sd10 is not performed, the net increase number in the predetermined register is maintained, and the process proceeds to step Sd11. .

At step Sd11, the net increase number value set in the predetermined register is set to the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (maximum number of payouts of slot machine 1 (15) is subtracted from the upper limit number of 2400, and It is determined whether or not the maximum number of bets (three) used for setting the number of bets has been added (Sd11). In step Sd11, when it is determined that the net increase number of sheets in the predetermined register does not exceed the specified number of sheets, by setting the net increase number of sheets in the predetermined register to the net increase number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the net increase number counter is set. The value is updated to the new net increase number value (Sd12).

After updating the net increase number counter to the new net increase number counter in step Sd12, the AT state management process is ended and the process returns to the main process. Further, even when it is determined in step Sd2 that the currently controlled game section is not the advantageous section, the AT state management process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd3 that the advantageous section end flag is set, and if it is determined in step Sd5 that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit, then in step Sd11 medals will be awarded in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the net increase in the number of cards exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sd13, and initializes a predetermined area of the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to control during the advantageous interval is stored, thereby forming the advantageous interval. Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) for termination is performed.

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of partitions of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the process (2 in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area partitions (Sd13). . Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, number of addresses included) correspond to the value indicated by the number of sections. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b storing the set table) is set in the predetermined register (HL) (Sd14). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses in the area to be initialized is set in a predetermined register (B), and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D) is acquired and used as the RAM address to be initialized. Set in a predetermined register (C) (Sd15).

After setting the initialization data (for example, 0) in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C) is stored. By setting the initialization data set in the register (A), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sd17). After that, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the RAM address to be initialized is advanced by one (Sd18).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), the number of remaining addresses is subtracted by 1 (Sd19), and then it is determined whether or not the number of remaining addresses is greater than 0 (Sd20). If it is determined in step Sd20 that the number of remaining initial addresses is greater than 0, the process returns to step Sd17, and the processes of Sd17 to Sd20 are repeated until the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. As a result, the memory area corresponding to the number of memory areas to be initialized (the number of addresses) from the start address of the memory area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table, is the initialization data. Initialized.

If it is determined in step Sd20 that the number of remaining addresses is not greater than 0, that is, if all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized, the value of the predetermined register (D) by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by the number of partitions in the memory area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sd21), and it is determined whether the value indicated by the number of partitions after subtraction is 0 (Sd22), If the value indicated by the number of partitions is not 0, the process returns to step Sd15, and based on the value indicated by the number of partitions, the number of storage areas to be initialized next is obtained from the RAM initialization table, and The number of addresses in the area is set in a predetermined register (B), and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the RAM initialization table, and is used as the predetermined RAM address to be initialized. After setting in the register (C) (Sd15), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), and the number of addresses becomes 0 in each process of steps Sd16 to Sd20. By repeating the above steps, the memory area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the memory area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating the processes in steps Sd15 to Sd22 until the number of divisions of the storage area becomes 0, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of divisions is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of divisions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to control during the advantageous interval includes data related to control of the AT state. ) is stored, data relating to control during the advantageous interval and data relating to control of the AT state, such as AT game number counter and advantageous interval game number counter , a net increase counter, an advantageous interval flag, etc. are initialized, and the AT state is terminated when the advantageous interval ends. By performing the advantageous interval data initialization process, for example, even if the AT game number counter value is 1 or more and the given AT game number remains without being consumed, the advantageous interval ends The AT game number counter and the like are initialized, and the AT game number and the like given during the advantageous interval are not inherited thereafter.

In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage areas of the predetermined two sections in the RAM 41c are initialized. A configuration may be employed in which a predetermined one segmented storage area or three or more segmented storage areas in the RAM 41c are initialized.

As described above, in the AT state management process, if the advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c while the advantageous interval is being controlled, the control of the advantageous interval ends. Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing a predetermined area in which data related to control in the advantageous section is stored is executed, and control is performed so as to end the control of the advantageous section.

In addition, the main control unit 41 sets an advantageous interval end flag indicating that the advantageous interval is to be ended in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the optional end condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied in the above-described ball-out control process. . Then, in the AT state management process, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c where the advantageous interval end flag is set by the ball output control process is referred to, and when the advantageous interval end flag is set, the advantageous interval data initialization process is executed. When the advantageous interval end flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous interval games is executed. When it is determined that the number of games has reached the maximum number of games, the advantageous interval data initialization process is executed to end control of the advantageous interval. In this case, by referring to the advantageous interval end flag, it is possible to omit the determination of whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the maximum number of games, thereby ending the control of the advantageous interval. there is

In the AT state management process, whether or not the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) is determined in the advantageous interval. When the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous interval data is initialized without setting the advantageous interval end flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Processing is executed to end the control of the advantageous section. Note that the termination condition of the advantageous interval is replaced with the termination condition that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). The end condition may be established when the number exceeds the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games (1499 in this embodiment).

In this embodiment, when the arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the ball output control process, the advantageous zone end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then the advantageous zone end flag is set in the AT state management process. Based on that, the advantageous interval data initialization process is executed to control to end control of the advantageous interval, while in the AT state management process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval is predetermined When the upper limit number of games is reached and the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed without setting the advantageous section end flag, and control of the advantageous section ends. However, even when the optional end condition is satisfied in the ball output control process, the number of games controlled to the advantageous interval in the AT state management process reaches the predetermined upper limit number of games, thereby ending the advantageous interval. Even when the end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end flag may be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section data initialization process may be executed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set. .

In the AT state management process, when an advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, and when the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous interval exceeds a specified number , the advantageous interval data initialization process is performed to initialize the data (including the AT state data) related to the advantageous interval, thereby terminating the advantageous interval.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in an advantageous section exceeds a specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in the section is within a predetermined rate. For example, the specified number is 2388 (a value obtained by subtracting the maximum payout number (15) in the slot machine 1 from 2400 as the upper limit number and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet amount). ), the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section can be 2400 or less, and the payout rate of medals over 1600 games can be 150% or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of medals from being paid out in the slot machine 1 in a predetermined period. Instead of the termination condition that is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined specified number (in this embodiment, 2388), the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section The same is true when the end condition is that the number of sheets reaches a predetermined number plus 1 (2389 in this embodiment). It should be noted that the termination condition of the advantageous section is replaced with the termination condition that is established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined specified number (2388 in this embodiment). The termination condition may be that the net increase in the number of paid out medals reaches a number obtained by adding 1 to a predetermined prescribed number (2389 in this embodiment).

In the AT state management process, the advantageous interval is ended when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous interval exceeds a specified number. When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of games, the advantageous section is terminated to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long period of time. By ending the AT state and the advantageous interval when exceeding , even if the number of games in the advantageous interval does not reach the upper limit number of games, the advantageous interval is prevented from continuing when the payout rate suddenly increases. It's like

In the AT state management process, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to terminate the advantageous section. First, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) without performing the processing for counting the number of medals (Sd6 to Sd10) and the processing for determining whether or not the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (Sd11). I do. As a result, when it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section have been met because the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the maximum number of games, the net increase in the number of medals, which is the condition for ending the advantageous section, does not exceed the specified number. Processing load can be reduced because the processing (Sd11) for judging whether to exceed or the processing (Sd6 to Sd10) for counting the net increase in medals initialized upon completion of the advantageous section are not performed.

In the AT state management process of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit number of games, it is determined whether the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number. First, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. On the other hand, when it is determined that the net increase number does not exceed the specified number, it may be determined whether or not the number of advantageous zone games has reached the upper limit number of games. In such a configuration, due to the design of the slot machine 1, the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are that the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the maximum number of games, and that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous interval exceeds a specified number. is likely to be satisfied, it is possible to preferentially determine whether or not the net increase in the number of medals, which is a termination condition that is likely to be satisfied, exceeds the specified number. The processing load can be reduced without judging the conditions.

In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). It is determined whether or not the net increase in number of medals has exceeded the specified number (Sd11), and if it is determined that the net increase in medals has exceeded the specified number, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is carried out to be advantageous. While controlling to end the section, if it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games, a process (Sd11) of determining whether or not the net increase in number of medals has exceeded the prescribed number is performed. Instead, the advantageous interval data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed and the advantageous interval is controlled to end. When either one of the cases of exceeding the specified number is established, and when both of them are established in the same game, common advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to end the advantageous section. Let As a result, even if both the number of games in the advantageous section reaching the maximum number of games in the advantageous section and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeding the specified number are satisfied at the same time, either one of them will be satisfied. Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same area is initialized as in the case where only is established can be performed to end the advantageous section.

In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). It is determined whether or not the number of net increases in medals exceeds the specified number (Sd11), and if it is determined that the number of net increases in medals exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to be advantageous. While controlling to end the section, if it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games, a process (Sd11) of determining whether or not the net increase in number of medals exceeds the specified number is performed. Instead, the advantageous interval data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed and the advantageous interval is controlled so that the advantageous interval ends. exceeds the specified number, common advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of games as conditions for ending the advantageous section, common advantageous section data Since the initialization processing is performed, the advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same area is initialized without difference is performed, and the advantageous section can be terminated.

In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the medal net increase number counter, the net increase number counter value is acquired as a net increase number value in a predetermined register, the payout number value is added to the net increase number value, and the bet value is subtracted. If the value obtained by the calculation is smaller than 0, by correcting the net increase number counter value to 0, as shown in FIGS. When it is smaller than (the value of the number of net additions at the start of the advantageous section (initial value 0)), the net increase number counter value becomes 0, and when the number of medals increases or decreases, the number of medals increases. The increase/decrease number of sheets becomes the net increase number counter value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 16(a), after the transition to the advantageous section, the number of increased or decreased medals tends to decrease without the navigation notification being performed, and by adding the increased or decreased number of medals to the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals When the counter value falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment), the net increase number counter value remains 0 for the period in which the number of increased or decreased medals remains below the initial value. After that, the AT state is controlled, and when the stop operation is performed according to the navigation notification, the number of increase/decrease of medals tends to increase. A value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the number of bets) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the net increase/decrease number counter value is set to the reference value when the increase/decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, that is, when the increase/decrease number of medals reaches the lowest value. It is designed to be a value that indicates the number of increments from .

Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(b), after the number of increase/decrease medals exceeds the initial value of the net increase number counter, it tends to decrease, and then falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment) again. In this case, the number of medals increases or decreases to 0 over the period in which the number of medals increases or decreases below the initial value. After that, as the increase/decrease number of medals tends to increase, the net increase number counter value is updated by sequentially adding the value corresponding to the net increase number of medals (the value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value). As a result, the net increase number counter value is a value that indicates the number of increased medals from the reference value, which is the number of medals increased or decreased when the number of increased or decreased medals reaches the lowest value.

In the AT state management process, after adding the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter value in the advantageous section, the calculation value obtained by subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase number counter value is 0. If it is larger, the value obtained by adding the payout number value to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value is set in the net increase number counter and updated. By setting 0 to the net increase number counter and updating it every game, when the net increase number counter becomes a negative value during the advantageous period, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and the net increase number counter is counted again from 0. Since the net increase number counter is updated so as to start from , it is possible to directly specify the amount of medal increase (net increase number) in the transition of the actual increase/decrease in the number of medals in the advantageous section as the net increase number counter value (Fig. 16 ( a) see).

In this embodiment, by performing the process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous interval, the counting of the net increase of medals is started when the advantageous interval is entered, and the net increase in the advantageous interval is counted. It is a configuration that counts the number of sheets, but when it is not in the AT state during the advantageous section, the process of updating the net increase number counter is not performed, and when it is in the AT state during the advantageous section, the processing of updating the net increase number counter is performed. good. Even with such a configuration, the net increase in the number of medals does not increase when it is not in the AT state and the navigation notification is not performed. The number of net increases in medals during the advantageous section can be counted in the same manner as the configuration for performing the process of updating the net increase number counter during the period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16(a), for example, during a period in which navigation notification is not performed after shifting to an advantageous section, there is no winning with a payout rate exceeding 1, and the increase or decrease in the number of medals does not exceed the reference value. In the case of a decrease, the increase/decrease in the number of medals tends to increase from the game in which the game is shifted to the AT state and the navigation notification is started after the shift to the advantageous section, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section in the game. is the lowest. Note that winning with a payout rate exceeding 1 may occur even during a period in which navigation information is not provided after the transition to the advantageous section. In order for the increase/decrease in the number of medals during the period to be monotonically increasing, if a win with a payout rate exceeding 1 occurs during the period, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous period will be lowest. In addition, after the increase/decrease in the number of medals falls below the reference value once during the period, the increase/decrease in the number of medals will tend to increase. In the game of , the net increase in the number of cards during the advantageous section is the smallest. As described above, the point in time when the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section becomes the smallest may change depending on the situation. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the net increase number counter value as the net increase number counter value in a predetermined register in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, and changes the net increase number counter value to the payout number value. If the value obtained by subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, the net increase number counter value is corrected to 0, so that in a game in which the number of medals increased or decreased has changed from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, the net increase The number counter is reset and the net increase number value is counted again from 0, and the net increase number is counted from the time point when the net increase number is the smallest in an advantageous section to accurately count the net increase number. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, by performing the process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous interval, the counting of the net increase of medals is started from the time of transition to the advantageous interval, and the net increase in the advantageous interval is counted. Although it is configured to count the number of sheets, it may be configured to perform processing for updating the net increase number counter regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section. With such a configuration, when the number of net increases in medals is on the increase in the section before shifting to the advantageous section, the net increase in number of medals in the section is taken over and the net increase in number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to increase the payout rate of medals to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification. , by performing a stop operation in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification, the medal payout rate becomes less than 1, and in the AT state, While the increase/decrease number of medals tends to increase by following the navigation notification, the increase/decrease number of medals tends to decrease in a state other than the AT state. Then, it is notified that it is a period in which the increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous section tends to increase.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. , the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to initialize the advantageous section data (including the AT state data), thereby making the advantageous section In the configuration for termination, that is, in the AT state management process, regardless of the termination condition of the advantageous section that has been established, a common advantageous section data initialization process is performed to uniformly initialize the data related to the advantageous section and terminate the advantageous section. However, at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section may be terminated by initializing the data relating to the advantageous section according to the end condition of the established advantageous section.

In this embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game during the advantageous interval is added to the net increase number counter, thereby counting the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous interval. In the event that a predetermined minor winning combination involving the payout of medals is won, the predetermined minor winning combination wins and medals are awarded regardless of whether or not the predetermined minor winning combination is won and medals are actually paid out as a result of the game. has been paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase number counter, thereby counting the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, when a predetermined small winning combination is won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section, it is assumed that the predetermined small winning combination has won and medals have been paid out, and the amount of medals to be paid out is counted by the net increase number counter. By intentionally missing the predetermined small combination, the net increase number counter does not exceed the prescribed number, and the number of games in the advantageous section can be prevented from being intentionally extended.

In addition, when a predetermined minor winning combination is won in an internal lottery, the predetermined minor winning combination wins and medals regardless of whether or not the predetermined minor winning combination is won and medals are actually paid out as a result of the game. is considered to have been paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section. In the event that a lottery target win is won, regardless of whether or not it is possible for the player to win the said minor win, if the said minor win wins, the winning of the said minor win To add the paid-out medals to a net increase number counter, and to ensure that a player wins a small winning combination including a small winning combination accompanied by the paying out of medals in an internal lottery when winning the lottery target winning combination. is possible, for example, the navigation target role is won as the lottery target role in the internal lottery, and the navigation notification is advantageous to the player. , 8C, and 8R are notified, it is possible to win a predetermined minor combination included in the navigation target combination, but the player is operated in an operation mode different from the reported operation mode. If it is not possible to win a predetermined small winning combination by doing so, or if a specific small winning combination is won and the operation is performed in a certain operation mode (operation at an operation timing that is within the specific winning range, etc.), the specific winning combination will always be In spite of the fact that it is possible to win a small winning combination, if a player is unable to win a specific small winning combination due to an operation mode other than a fixed operating mode, the player may win a prize. It is assumed that the possible small win was won and medals were paid out, and by adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted, and an internal lottery is performed. If a lottery winning combination including a small winning combination with a medal payout is won, the player cannot win the winning combination in a situation where it is impossible for the player to win the winning combination, for example, In a situation where a navigation target role is won as a lottery target role in an internal lottery, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player is not reported by the navigation notification, a predetermined small number included in the navigation target role is selected. It is preferable that the net increase number counter is not added when the combination cannot be won. If the medals cannot be increased, the net increase number counter is incremented only when the medals actually increase, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, thereby increasing the number of bets. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal used for setting is smaller than 0, the net increase number counter value is corrected to 0, so that the increase/decrease number of medals in the net increase number counter is reduced to 0. When it is less than 0, it does not count values less than 0, but counts only values greater than 0. When medals are paid out during the advantageous section, the number of medals paid out is added to the net increase counter, and when medals are used to set the bet amount, the number of medals is added. By repeatedly performing the process of subtracting the value from the net increase number counter, the number of net increases in medals in the advantageous section is counted, so that the number of increase/decrease numbers of medals may be counted both when it is less than 0 and when it exceeds 0. . With such a configuration, the net increase number counter is not corrected to 0 when the increase/decrease number of medals is less than 0, so the processing for counting the net increase number by the net increase number counter can be simplified.

In this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, which is used to set the number of bets. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the medal value is smaller than 0, the net increase number counter value is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increase number counter. By controlling to update the counter value of the number of net additions so as to set the value, the number of net additions of medals is counted starting from the time when the number of net additions of medals decreases the most after the start of the advantageous section. After the start of the advantageous section, the timing at which the number of net increases in medals decreases the most can change depending on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 causes the net increase number counter to start counting the number of net increases in tokens when a uniformly set trigger occurs after the start of the advantageous section, and the trigger is set. It is also possible to count the number of net additions of medals up to the present as the starting point, and end the advantageous section when the number of net additions of medals exceeds a prescribed number.

For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and if the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section As a configuration for ending , counting by the net increase number counter starts when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, and the net increase in medals up to the present starting from the time when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number. The configuration may be such that the advantageous section is terminated when the time limit is exceeded. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for judging the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase in medals is set at a point other than when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number counter value, the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number counter value can be simplified.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number, As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the transition to the AT state is suggested by the section display LED 12a, and the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. It is also possible to terminate the advantageous section and shift to the normal section when the net increase in medals up to the present exceeds the specified number. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the termination condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display LED 12a shifts to the advantageous section Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the number of net increase in medals starting from other than when the operation mode to increase the number of medals is notified by the navigation notification, the net increase number counter It is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number, As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display LED 12a suggests that the section display LED 12a has shifted to the AT state regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. When the number of net additions of medals up to the present starting from , the advantageous section may be ended and the normal section may be started when the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the number of medals by the navigation notification. Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, there is no need to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from other than when the transition to the advantageous section is indicated by the section display LED 12a. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number counter value.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is controlled to end. Only the number of medals paid out in each game is counted without counting the number of medals used for setting the number, and when the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous section ends. It may be configured to control to For example, the prescribed number of total payouts is set to 2865 (net increase in number (2400) where the payout rate of medals in 1600 games is 150%, and the shortest number of games in which the net increase in medals is awarded (160 games = 2400/1 The maximum payout amount per game (15)) and the number of medals used to set the bet amount (480 medals = 160 games x the prescribed number per game 3), the payout in one game on the slot machine 1 When the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous period exceeds the specified number of medals obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of medals, the advantageous period is terminated. The maximum net increase in the number of medals paid out in the section can be 2400 or less, and the medal payout rate for 1600 games can be 150% or less. The same effect can be achieved by terminating the advantageous interval when the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (predetermined number+1).

[About medal payout processing]
The details of the medal payout process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 .

As shown in FIG. 17, in the medal payout process, first, a winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is obtained in a predetermined register (Se1), and a winning number/payout number command setting process is performed (Se2). In the winning number/number of payout command setting process, for a winning combination specified based on a winning flag set and acquired in a predetermined register, a winning number that can identify the winning combination and medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning combination. The command queue is set so that a command that can specify the number of sheets is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted to the sub-controller 91 by timer interrupt processing.

After the winning number/number of payout command setting process is performed in step Se2, the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning of the winning combination specified based on the winning flag acquired in step Se1 is acquired (Se3). , the number of medals to be paid out is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the number of remaining medals (Se4).

After that, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of sheets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 0 (Se5). (Se6), and based on the credit counter value, it is determined whether or not the credit has reached the upper limit (50 in this embodiment) (Se7).

If it is determined in step Se7 that the credits have not reached the upper limit, 1 is added to the credit counter value (Se8), and processing at the time of medal payout is performed (Se9). In the medal payout process, based on the credit counter value, data for displaying the value corresponding to the credit counter value is set in the output buffer of the credit indicator 11, and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A process of subtracting 1 from the remaining number of medals, adding 1 to the identifiable number of paid-out medals set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and displaying a value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals after the addition. The data for the game is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 . The initial value of the number of paid-out medals is 0, and the number of paid-out medals is initialized at the end of one game.

After the medal payout process is performed in step Se9, the credit payout interval wait process is performed (Se10). In the credit payout interval waiting process, a predetermined waiting time (in the present embodiment, a time during which the player can visually recognize changes in the display contents of the credit indicator 11 and the game auxiliary indicator 12, for example, a medal It waits for about 0.16 seconds or the like for each payout, and when the waiting time elapses, the credit payout interval waiting process ends. By performing credit payout interval waiting processing, timer interrupt processing is performed during a predetermined waiting time, and the display modes of the credit display device 11 and the game auxiliary display device 12 correspond to the data set in each output buffer. The display mode will be updated. Further, the credit counter value and the number of paid-out medals updated by the medal payout processing are displayed on the credit display 11 and the game assistance display 12 for at least a predetermined waiting time, and the credit display 11 and the game assistance display. A player or the like can visually recognize a change in the display contents of the container 12 .

After the credit payout interval waiting process is performed in step Se10, the process returns to step Se5, and the processes of steps Se5 to Se10 are repeated until the remaining number set in the RAM 41c becomes zero. Then, in step Se5, when it is determined that the number of remaining coins is 0, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

Further, when it is determined that the credit has reached the upper limit based on the credit counter in step Se7, hopper payout processing is performed (Se11). In the hopper payout process, the hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven, and each time the payout sensor of the hopper unit 35 detects the payout of one medal, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of medals set in the RAM 41c to complete the payout. After adding 1 to the number of medals, a process of setting data for displaying a value corresponding to the number of paid-out medals after the addition in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is repeated until the remaining number becomes 0. . Thus, every time medals are paid out from the hopper unit 35, the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated. When the remaining number of coins becomes 0, the hopper motor is stopped and the hopper payout process is terminated. After performing the hopper payout process, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

In this manner, in the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is won, the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning of the small winning combination is added to the credits within the range up to the credit upper limit if there is a vacancy in the credits. Processing is performed, and when there is no vacancy in the credits, the number of medals that could not be added to the credits is paid out from the hopper unit through the medal payout port 9.例文帳に追加

In addition, in medal payout processing, when a small win occurs and medals are paid out to credits, each time one medal is added to the credits, the medal payout processing is performed and the number of paid out medals is displayed. After setting the data for making it to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, by performing the credit payout interval waiting process, timer interrupt processing is performed and set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 The display of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated based on the data, and the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the updated state until a predetermined waiting time elapses. Repeat. As a result, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out to credits, the display of the number of paid out medals on the game auxiliary display 12 is performed sequentially over a predetermined time (the number of paid out medals to credits×waiting time). Updated.

In addition, in the medal payout process, when a small winning win occurs and medals are paid out from the hopper unit, the hopper payout process is performed for a predetermined time corresponding to the number of payout medals (for example, 100 ms per medal). The hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven over a period of time, and data for displaying the number of paid out medals is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 each time the payout sensor detects the payout of one medal. do. Then, the display of the auxiliary game display 12 is updated based on the data set in the output buffer of the auxiliary game display 12 by performing timer interrupt processing during the time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out. As a result, the display of the number of payout medals on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated over a period of time corresponding to the number of payout medals.

[Regarding replay process]
The details of the control performed by the main control unit 41 during the replay operation will be described with reference to FIG. 18 .

As shown in FIG. 18, in the replay operation processing, first, the winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sf1), and whether or not the replay combination has won is determined based on the winning flag. Determine (Sf2).

When it is determined in step Sf2 that the replay combination has won a prize, a replay flag capable of specifying that the replay is to be activated in the next game is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf3). A medal counter setting process is performed (Sf4). In the re-game medal counter setting process, the prescribed number of bets for the game is specified, and the prescribed number of bets for the game is stored as re-game medals in the re-game medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Set the minute value (3 in this embodiment).

After the replay medal counter setting process is performed in step Sf4, the lighting state of the replaying LED 20 is set to the lighting state (Sf5), and the process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Sf6). By performing the one-interrupt waiting process in step Sf6, the timer interrupt process is executed, the LED dynamic display process is performed, and the LED 20 is controlled to be lit during replay.

After the one-time interruption waiting process is performed in the step of Sf6, the regame operation time process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. Further, when it is determined in step Sf2 that the replay combination has not won a prize based on the winning flag, the process at the time of replay operation is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

In this manner, in the replay operation processing, when a replay combination is won in the game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to light up.

Further, in the re-game activation process, when a re-game combination wins in the game, re-game medals are set in the re-game medal counter, so that re-game medals can be used at the start of the game start waiting process in the next game. The medals are set as the bet amount, and the specified number of bets is set, so that the game can be played again.

[Regarding timer interrupt processing]
The contents of control of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 .

The timer interrupt processing is processing performed by the main control unit 41 at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt processing is set to a longer time than the sum of the time taken for the processing to be repeated according to the control state in the main processing and the execution time of the timer interrupt processing. Between the timer interrupt processing and the processing that is always repeated according to the control state, at least one cycle is performed.

As shown in FIG. 19, timer interrupt processing includes LED dynamic display processing, and LED dynamic display processing is executed each time timer interrupt processing is performed.

In the LED dynamic display process, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit indicator 11, game assistance indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, input request LED 17, start valid LED 18, waiting LED 19, replay LED 20, etc.) is set to dynamically light up according to the state of the output buffer set by each processing such as the main processing, and is transmitted to the lighting control circuit of the indicator such as various LEDs. etc. By performing the LED dynamic display process, indicators such as various LEDs are controlled in lighting modes according to the data set in the corresponding output buffers.

In the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, although not shown, a power failure determination process for detecting the occurrence of a power failure (power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped), and a main The data set in the register of the control unit 41 and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is backed up by the backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents are preserved as long as the power is supplied by the backup power supply. Power interruption processing for saving to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing for initializing a predetermined output port when a power interruption occurs, and generation of data capable of specifying the detection status of various switches based on the detection status of various switches. processing, processing for updating various predetermined timers set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing for transmitting predetermined external output signals to the outside of the slot machine 1, processing for transmitting various commands set in the command queue, game Each reel is driven and stopped by sending an excitation signal to the reel motor 32 of the reel unit 34 according to the progress of the reel unit 34, etc., and various processes are executed in a predetermined order. there is

[Regarding the transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display etc. at the start of the advantageous section]
After the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the section display start condition is satisfied and the section display is started, the game auxiliary display 12, section display LED 12a, input request LED 17, replay LED 20, 1 to 3 BET LED 14 to The transition of the 16 display modes will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 executes the above-described main processing, performs the game start waiting processing and the ball output control processing, so that at the start of the game, the game auxiliary display 12, the section display LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, and the replaying LED 20 , 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), in the game start waiting process, when there is an empty credit or bet amount and medals can be inserted, lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started. After that, when the number of bets is set by inserting medals or operating the MAXBET switch 6, the lighting of the corresponding 1st to 3rd bet LEDs 14 to 16 is sequentially started. Then, when the prescribed number of bets is set, the start valid LED 18 starts lighting up. In addition, when a replay role is won in the previous game and a replay is granted, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit during the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

By operating the start switch 7 in this state, the game is started and an internal lottery is performed. Then, in the ball output control process, when the section display start condition is established and the advantageous section flag is set, state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, and then one interrupt is performed. By performing the waiting process, lighting of the section display LED 12a is started.

Then, after the one-interruption waiting process is performed, a navigation number indicating an operation mode corresponding to the navigation target role won in the internal lottery is displayed by the instruction setting process during the ball output control process. Display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 . After that, by performing timer interrupt processing, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 corresponding to the navigation number (3 in this embodiment) (in this embodiment, the first, third, and fourth segments of the left side display 12L , 6, 7 segments and the 4th segment of the right display 12R) start to light up. That is, after the section display LED 12a starts lighting, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 indicating the navigation number starts lighting.

After the ball output control process is completed, the reel control process is performed, and after the wait has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the previous game, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated. will be started.

Further, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a command capable of specifying the operation mode suggested by the navigation notification when the navigation notification is performed in the instruction setting processing during the ball output control processing. control to On the other hand, if it is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that the main control unit 41 side will perform the navigation notification at the start of the game, the sub-control unit 91 , the control of the navigation effect is executed, and the liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display the navigation image suggesting the operation mode suggested by the navigation notification. Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that the lighting of the section display LED 12a has started, the sub-control unit 91 confirms that the section display will start, that is, control to the AT state. The AT determination notification for notifying that the AT has been set is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Since the instruction setting process on the main control unit 41 side is performed after the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started, the navigation effect by the sub-control unit 91 is performed after the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started. .

In this manner, the main control unit 41 performs control to start lighting the section display LED 12a when the section display start condition is satisfied in the ball-out control process performed at the start of the game, so that the section display start condition is satisfied. At the start of the game, the section display LED 12a starts to light up, and the section display for informing that the control is in the advantageous section is started.

Further, in the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 controls to start displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting lighting of the section display LED 12a. By the time the navigation notification is started in , the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started to notify that the advantageous section has started.

Further, in the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 performs control to start the navigation notification on the auxiliary game display 12, and then performs the reel control process to control the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. , after the game is started in response to the operation of the start switch 7, navigation information is started on the game auxiliary display 12 before the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to rotate at a constant speed.

In this embodiment, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a in the ball output control process, the one-interrupt waiting process is performed to start lighting of the section display LED 12a. After that, the instruction setting process is performed, and the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display is started. It is also possible to perform a delay process that intentionally delays over a period of time, perform an instruction setting process, and start navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the sub-controller 91 side to perform an AT determination notification to notify that control to the AT state has been determined within a predetermined period during which the delay processing is being performed. , the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started after the AT determination notification is performed.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting of the section display LED 12a in the ball output control process, and then perform the instruction setting process to start the navigation notification. After starting lighting of the section display LED 12a in the control process, the instruction setting process is performed in the reel control process, and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate, the navigation information may be started. . With such a configuration, at the start of the game in which the interval display start condition is satisfied, after the interval display LED 12a has started lighting, the predetermined wait period, that is, the predetermined certain period from the start of the previous game has passed. At this time, the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started. It should be noted that if the predetermined wait period has elapsed at the start of the game in which the section display start condition is established, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R will start substantially at the same time that the section display LED 12a starts lighting. Along with the start, the navigation display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting of the section display LED 12a in the ball output control process, and then start navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12. At the start of the game in which the conditions are satisfied, the section display LED 12a is started to light up. After that, at a predetermined timing until the game is finished (for example, when the third stop operation is finished, when the payout of medals is finished, when the award of replay is finished, etc.), the section display LED 12a is turned on. A configuration in which lighting is started may be used.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform AT determination notification when lighting of the section display LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side. In the game in which the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side, the AT determination notification may be performed at a timing before the lighting of the section display LED 12a is started on the main control unit 41 side. Further, based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that it is confirmed that the section display is started after winning the AT lottery after shifting to the advantageous section. The AT decision notification may be performed at any timing within the period from the time when the section display start condition is satisfied on the main control unit 41 side, that is, at the timing before the AT state is started.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start lighting the section display LED 12a at the start of the game in which the navigation notification is started. The lighting of the section display LED 12a may be started before the game is started. In this case, the sub-control section 91 may also be configured to perform AT confirmation notification at the timing when the main control section 41 starts lighting the section display LED 12a after determining to shift to the AT state.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting lighting of the section display LED 12a. In the processing, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, the one-interrupt waiting processing is not performed, and then the instruction setting processing is performed by the time the timer interrupt processing is performed, By making it possible to set the navigation display data of the navigation notification to the output buffer of the auxiliary game display 12, as shown in FIG. The lighting of the display LED 12a and the display of the navigation information on the game auxiliary display 12 may be started at the same time. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting the section display LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section, thereby informing that the advantageous section is being controlled.

[Regarding the transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display etc. at the end of the advantageous section]
21 and 22, transitions of the display modes of the auxiliary game display 12, the section display LED 12a, the input request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16 at the end of the advantageous section will be described.

When a game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in an internal lottery, the advantageous section is shifted to a normal section, and the symbol combination of the small winning combination is on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Regarding the case of stopping, the timing at which the end of the advantageous section is notified by the section display LED 12a will be described with reference to FIG. 21(a).

As shown in FIG. 21(a), after the game is started in the advantageous section and a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed, and when at least one reel is under rotation control, the game is started. The auxiliary display 12 (excluding the 8th segment of the right display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be lit. In addition, when a replay role is won in the previous game and a replay is granted, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit during the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

Then, after the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, the reel control processing is completed, and then the AT state. Administrative processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. In addition, the flag during the advantageous section is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the symbol combination of the small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and when the small combination is won, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 9) are controlled to be paid out. , the number of paid out medals is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12.例文帳に追加As a result, the display mode of the auxiliary game display 12 is sequentially updated so as to be counted up to the final value indicating the predetermined number of coins corresponding to the winning minor combination. Until the final value of the number of paid out medals is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, there is a waiting time for paying out medals to credit or a predetermined time for paying out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper unit. will be required.

When the payout of a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the winning minor combination is completed, the medal payout process is terminated, and the process of setting the state control data in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a is performed in the main process. . In this process, based on the fact that the advantageous section flag is cleared in the above-described AT state management process, the state control data (extinguishing) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, and then timer interrupt processing is executed. By doing so, the section display LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the medal maintenance permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is an empty bet amount or credits, and the medal maintenance permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 is made to take in the medals. is set to ON state, the input request LED 17 is set to ON. After that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started by the timer interrupt processing being performed. Further, in the game start waiting process, reception of payment operation by the payment switch 10 is enabled by the operation input reception process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small winning combination is the reel 2L. In the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, so that the reel control process is ended. , the final value of the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning of the predetermined small winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 by the medal payout process, and then the state control data (turned off) is stored in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main process. is set, and the section display LED 12a is extinguished. As a result, the end of the advantageous section is notified by the section display LED 12a. Furthermore, after that, lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

Further, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the symbol combinations of the small winning combination are the reels 2L, 2C, and 2C. In the case of stopping at 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and then the reel control process is ended, and then the main By the processing, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. Then, the reception of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input reception processing of the game start waiting processing which is performed thereafter. In other words, during the period from when the reels are stopped in the game until the settlement operation is accepted, the section display LED 12a informs that the advantageous section has ended.

Next, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination is the reel 2L, Regarding the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, the timing at which the end of the advantageous section is notified by the section display LED 12a will be described with reference to FIG. 21(b).

As shown in FIG. 21(b), after the game is started in the advantageous section and a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed, and when at least one reel is under rotation control, the game is started. The auxiliary display 12 (excluding the eighth segment of the right display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, the reel control processing is completed, and then the AT state. Administrative processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. In addition, the flag during the advantageous section is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the minor winning combination won in the internal lottery is lost, and no prize-winning involving the payout of medals occurs, so the payout control of medals and the control to update the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 are not performed. is terminated at At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the off state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, in the main process, based on the fact that the advantageous section flag is cleared by the AT state management process, state control data (extinguishing) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. After that, the section display LED 12a is extinguished by performing timer interrupt processing.

After that, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

Then, in the game start waiting process, the passage switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state so as to take in the medals on the condition that the bet number or the credits are vacant by the medal maintenance permission setting process of the game start waiting process. After that, the input request LED 17 is set to ON, and lighting of the input request LED 17 is started. Further, in the game start waiting process, reception of payment operation by the payment switch 10 is enabled by the operation input reception process.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination is the reel 2L. , 2C, and 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended, and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, thereby ending the reel control process. After that, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main processing without performing the control to update the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 by the medal payout processing, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. lights out. As a result, the end of the advantageous section is notified by the section display LED 12a. After that, lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

Further, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination is the reels 2L and 2C. , 2R, the operation of the stop switch relating to the third stop operation is terminated and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is terminated, and then the reel control processing is terminated. By the main processing, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. Then, the reception of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input reception processing of the game start waiting processing which is performed thereafter. That is, during the period from when the reels are stopped in the game to when the settlement operation is accepted, the section display LED 12a informs that the advantageous section has ended.

Further, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination is the reels 2L and 2C. , 2R, after the end of the reel control process, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not updated by the medal payout process, and the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main process. is set to state control data (lights off), and the section display LED 12a is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a small winning combination is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small winning combination. are stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning of a small winning combination is displayed on the auxiliary game display 12 by the medal payout process. After that, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main processing, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. That is, the timing at which the section display LED 12a is extinguished differs between the case where the combination of symbols of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and the case where the combination of symbols of the small combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. .

It should be noted that even when the combination of symbols of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and also when the combination of symbols of the small winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the output buffer of the section display LED 12a is put into the state by the main processing. By setting the control data (turning off), the section display LED 12a is turned off, and the processing timing at which the section display LED 12a is turned off is common. However, in the case where the missing symbol combination of the minor winning combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, after the end of the reel control process, the control for displaying the number of payout medals on the game auxiliary display 12 is not performed, and the main reel is displayed. While the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the processing, when the symbol combination of the minor winning combination stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel control processing is terminated and furthermore. After the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the auxiliary game display 12, state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main process, and reel control is performed. The time interval from the end of the process until the section display LED 12a is turned off is different, and the timing at which the section display LED 12a is turned off is also different.

Next, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, a lottery target combination including replay combinations A and B, for example, is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section. In the case where the symbol combination of the replay hand A or the replay hand B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the timing at which the end of the advantageous segment is notified by the segment display LED 12a will be described with reference to FIG. do. It should be noted that the replay hands A and B are replay hands having different symbol combinations for at least one reel. Further, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first order of operation, the constituent symbols of the replaying combination A are preferentially stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. By operating in the second operation order other than the first operation mode, reel stop control is performed so that symbols constituting the replaying combination B are preferentially stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. ing.

As shown in FIG. 22, after the game is started in the advantageous section and the lottery target combinations including the replay combinations A and B are won in the internal lottery, reel control processing is performed. When the reel control process is being performed and at least one reel is being controlled to rotate, the game auxiliary display 12 (excluding the 8th segment of the right display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, and the waiting The LED 19 and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

Then, after the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is completed (the stop switch is released) and the rotation of all the reels is stopped, the reel control processing is completed, and then the AT state. Administrative processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the game section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. In addition, the flag during the advantageous section is cleared.

After performing the AT state management process, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, when the symbol combination of the replaying role A or the symbol combination of the replaying role B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the medals are paid out and the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is updated. is terminated without At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained in the off state.

Then, after the medal payout process is completed, the replay operation time process is performed, a predetermined value is set in the replay medal counter, and the replay LED 20 is set to ON to turn on the replay LED 20. is started.

After that, in the main processing, based on the fact that the advantageous section flag is cleared by the AT state management processing, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, and then the timer interrupt processing is performed. As a result, the section display LED 12a is turned off.

After that, the game end setting processing is performed, so that the main processing for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting processing for the next game is performed.

Then, based on the fact that the replay medal counter is set to 1 or more in the game start waiting process, the number of bets up to the specified number is set to 1 each, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially set to the ON state. 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 start to light up sequentially. After that, in the medal maintenance permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is an empty bet amount or credits, and the medal maintenance permission flag is set, so that the passage switching solenoid 30 is caused to take in the medals. is set to ON state, the input request LED 17 is set to ON. After that, the lighting of the input request LED 17 is started by the timer interrupt processing being performed.

In this way, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, when the lottery target combination including the re-playing combination A and B is won as the winning combination in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, When the symbol combination of the replaying hand A or the symbol combination of the replaying hand B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch relating to the third stop operation is ended, and all the reels 2L, 2C. , 2R stops rotating, after the reel control process is completed, the replay operation process is performed and the lighting of the replaying LED 20 is started. State control data (lights off) is set, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. As a result, the end of the advantageous section is notified by the section display LED 12a. Further, after that, after the 1st to 3rd bet LEDs 14 to 16 sequentially start lighting from the game start waiting process, lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started.

Further, when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section, the lottery target combination including the re-playing combination A and B is won as the winning combination in the internal lottery, and when the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the re-game is performed. When the symbol combination of the hand A or the symbol combination of the replay hand B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, after the reel control process is completed, the lighting of the replaying LED 20 is started by the replay operation process. After that, the state control data (turn off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a by the main processing, and the section display LED 12a is turned off. That is, when the symbol combination of the replaying combination A stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and when the symbol combination of the replaying combination B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the interval display LED 12a is extinguished. becomes common.

[Transition of control state regarding AT]
A control state (ball-out state) relating to the AT controlled by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 23 .

As shown in FIG. 23, the main control unit 41 can control the AT-related control states to a non-AT state, a precursor state, an AT state, and additional states A to C. FIG. Regardless of whether the game state is controlled to non-internal, internal, or special state (BB general, RB), when the game section is controlled to the normal section, only the non-AT state Control. In addition, when the game state is controlled to either non-internal or special state (BB general, RB) and the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, it is controlled only to the non-AT state. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled internally and the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, it is controlled to any of the non-AT state, precursor state, AT state, and additional states A to C.

The non-AT state is a state in which AT control is not performed and navigation notification is not performed. In the non-AT state, navigation notification is not performed even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery regardless of whether the game section is controlled to be a normal section or an advantageous section. Since the navigation notification is not performed, the payout rate of medals does not exceed 100% in the non-AT state.

In addition, in the non-AT state, on the condition that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the game state is controlled to be internal, the AT lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the order of pressing is When the small winning combination 1 to 6, the specific small winning combination 1, the specific small winning combination 2, and the replay winning combination 1) are won, an AT lottery is performed. In the AT lottery, it is determined whether or not to shift to the AT state and the number of games to be controlled to the AT state when shifting to the AT state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the number of AT games). By winning the AT lottery, it is decided to shift to the AT state and a predetermined number of AT games are awarded.

In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, an AT game number counter for counting the remaining number of AT games is set. The AT game number counter value is initialized to 0. Then, when the AT lottery is won, the number of AT games won is added to the AT game number counter. After that, under the condition that the AT game number counter value is 1 or more, the AT state is controlled.

In addition, in the non-AT state, if it is not established that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the game state is controlled inside, that is, the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, but the game If the state is controlled to non-internal, or if the game section is controlled to the normal section, and if the game state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, internal lottery Even if the AT lottery target role is won, the AT lottery is not performed and the number of AT games is not awarded. As a result, when it is controlled in the normal section or when it is controlled in the non-internal state, the payout rate of medals is 100 by not shifting to the AT state and not performing the navigation notification. % is not exceeded.

Further, the non-AT state is terminated at the end of the game in which the AT lottery target combination has been won in the internal lottery, and is shifted to the portent state over a predetermined number of games. The number of games to be controlled to the portent state is selected and determined by a portent state lottery from the number of games (5 to 20 games) within a predetermined range at the time of transition to the portent state. In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a precursor state counter for counting the number of remaining games in the precursor state is set. A counter value is initialized to 0, and when a portent state lottery is performed, the number of portent state games determined by the portent state lottery is added to the portent state counter.

The portent state is a state controlled by winning an AT lottery target combination in an internal lottery in the non-AT state, and is a state in which navigation notification can be performed. In the premonitory state, when the internal lottery wins the navigation target role (in this embodiment, the small winnings 1 to 6 in order of pushing), a navigation lottery is held to determine with a predetermined probability whether or not to perform the navigation notification. , by winning the navigation lottery, control is performed so that navigation notification is performed. In the navigation lottery in the premonitory state, it is decided to perform the navigation notification so that the medal payout rate (the number of medals paid out / the number of bets) in the premonitory state is about 100%. ing. Thus, in the portent state, when the navigation notification is performed, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, and are included in the winning push-order small combination. The payout rate of medals can be set to about 100% by winning an increasing combination that increases the number of medals among the winning combinations.

In this embodiment, in the premonitory state, when the navigation target role is won, the navigation notification is performed at such a frequency that the payout rate of medals is about 100%, and the AT state (low probability) is controlled. By doing so, the number of medals possessed by the player does not increase or decrease from the start time at the end of the AT state (low probability), and the number of medals at the start time is maintained. , the number of medals possessed by the player may be increased or decreased from the start time point at the end time point of the premonitory state. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the increase/decrease rate of medals in the omen state is within the range from the increase/decrease rate in the non-AT state to the increase/decrease rate in the AT state.

In the premonitory state, after the above-described game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, in the first game in which the navigation notification is performed, the section display is controlled and the section display LED 12a starts lighting up. Then, the section display LED 12a is controlled to remain lit until the end of the advantageous section.

In each game during the precursor state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the aforementioned precursor state counter value is zero. If the counter value is not 0, the precursor state counter value is decremented by 1 by the end of the game, and the precursor state is maintained in the next game. On the other hand, when the precursor state counter value is 0, the AT game number counter is referenced to determine whether or not the remaining number of the given AT games is 1 or more. Then, when it is determined that the remaining number of AT games is 1 or more, control is performed to end the precursor state and shift to the AT state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of AT games is not 1 or more, control is performed to terminate the precursor state and shift to the non-AT state.

The AT state is a state controlled by consuming the number of given AT games, and is a state in which AT control can be performed and navigation notification can be performed. In the AT state, when the internal lottery wins the navigation target role (in this embodiment, the small winnings 1 to 6 in order of pushing), a navigation lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform the navigation notification, as in the premonitory state. By winning the navigation lottery, control is performed so that the navigation notification is performed. In the navigation lottery in the AT state, it is determined that the player wins without fail and that the navigation notification is performed at a frequency of 100% when the navigation target role is won. As a result, in the AT state, the navigation notification is always performed when the navigation target role is won. Then, by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation information, an increasing combination that increases the number of medals among the winning combinations included in the winning pressing-order minor combination is won. Thus, the payout rate of medals can be set to a predetermined payout rate exceeding 100% (for example, about 200% to about 260% (3 to 5 net additions per game)).

In each game during the AT state, the main control unit 41 subtracts 1 from the above AT game number counter value, and then determines whether or not the AT game number counter value is zero. When the AT game number counter value is not 0, the AT state is maintained. On the other hand, when the AT game number counter value is 0, control is performed so that the AT state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-AT state at the end of the game.

In addition, in the AT state, when an additional lottery target combination (in this embodiment, push-order small combination 1 to 6, specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2, and replay combination 1) is won in the internal lottery, an additional lottery combination is won. hold a lottery. In the addition lottery, it is determined whether or not to add the number of AT games and, if so, the number of AT games to be added. By winning the additional lottery, the number of AT games won is added to the AT game number counter. In addition, the main control unit 41 determines the condition for starting the ED control described later (at least one of the number of games in the advantageous section reaching a first predetermined value and the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeding a second predetermined value). In the game after it is confirmed that is established, control is performed so that the additional lottery is not performed. By determining the start condition of ED control, the AT state will continue until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Since the section ends, unnecessary control, such as control of the additional lottery, can be reduced by performing control so that the additional lottery will not be performed in the game after the condition for starting the ED control is satisfied.

In addition, the AT state and the precursor state meet the conditions for ending the above-mentioned advantageous interval (at least one of the above-mentioned advantageous interval games reaching the upper limit number of games, or the number of net increases in medals exceeding a specified number). When the condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the state is shifted to the non-AT state.

In addition, in the AT state, when an additional state lottery target combination (in this embodiment, a specific small combination 1 and a specific small combination 2) is won in the internal lottery, it is controlled to one of the additional states A to C described later. An additional state lottery will be held to determine whether or not. In the addition state lottery, the probability of determining control to the addition state B is set higher than the probability of determining control to the addition state A, and it is decided to control to the addition state C. is set higher than the probability that it is decided to control to the added state B. In addition, if the additional status lottery is triggered by the winning of the special minor role 2 in the internal lottery among the eligible roles of the extra status lottery, the winning of the specific minor role 1 in the internal lottery will be the trigger. It is determined to control to one of the additional states A to C with a higher probability than when it is performed (see FIG. 30). In addition, the main control unit 41 determines the condition for starting the ED control described later (at least one of the number of games in the advantageous section reaching a first predetermined value and the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeding a second predetermined value). In the game after it is confirmed that is established, control is performed so that the addition state lottery is not performed. By determining the start condition of ED control, the AT state will continue until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Since the section ends, unnecessary control such as the control of the added state, the control of the added lottery, etc. can be reduced by controlling the addition state lottery not to be performed in the game after the start condition of the ED control is established. .

Then, the main control unit 41 performs a predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, an AT game If the number counter value is 3 or more, and if the AT game number counter value is less than 3 in the game, control is performed to shift to the corresponding add-on state A to C after the lapse of 0 games).

The additional states A to C are states in which an additional lottery is performed at a higher probability than in the AT state, and are controlled over a predetermined number of games determined in advance according to each additional state. In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, an add-on state game number counter for counting the number of remaining games in the add-on state is set. A predetermined number of games (3 games for the added state A, 10 games for the added states B and C) predetermined according to the winning added state is set in the added state game number counter. At the start of each game controlled to the added state, the added state game number counter is decremented by 1, and on the condition that the added state game number counter value after the subtraction is 1 or more, the added state is continued to be controlled. On the other hand, when the added state game number counter value becomes 0, the added state is terminated and the state is shifted to the AT state.

Further, in the add-on states A to C, an add-on lottery for determining the number of AT games to be added at the start of the add-on state is performed, and the number of AT games won is added to the AT game number counter. In the addition lottery at the start of the addition state, it is determined that the number of AT games equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games (at least one game in this embodiment) will be added. The number of AT games is always added by being controlled. In addition, in addition states A to C, when an additional lottery target combination (in the present embodiment, pushing order small combination 1 to 6, specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2, replay combination 1) is won in the internal lottery. Then, an addition lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to add the number of AT games and, if so, the number of AT games to be added. By winning the additional lottery, the number of AT games won is added to the AT game number counter. In the add-on lottery that is triggered by winning the additional lottery target role in the add-on states A to C, the probability that the number of AT games will be added and the number of AT games to be added are subject to the add-on lottery in the AT state. It is higher than the additional lottery that is performed when the role is won.

In addition, in the addition lottery that is performed at the start of the addition states A to C and when the winning combination for the addition lottery is won, the expected value of the number of AT games to be added in each of the addition states A to C is given so that it is within a predetermined range. The number of AT games to be played is determined. The expected value of the number of AT games to be added in the addition state B is set higher than the expected value of the number of AT games to be added in the addition state C, and the expected number of AT games to be added in the addition state A The value is set higher than the expected value of the number of AT games added in the added state B (see FIG. 30).

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control a plurality of types of states including a non-AT state and an AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state as the AT-related control state. Yes, it is possible to control the AT state by digesting the number of given AT games.

In this embodiment, the number of AT games is given by an AT lottery, and the given AT game number is consumed to control the AT state. Alternatively, the payout number or the net increase number of medals may be given by an AT lottery, and these may be digested to control the AT state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines the correct pressing order when an internal lottery wins a pressing order in which the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increases medals changes (correct pressing order). In the navigation notification control, the correct pressing order can be notified in the AT state, and in the AT state, the frequency at which the correct pressing order is notified by the navigation notification than in the non-AT state is more advantageous to the player than in the non-AT state.

In addition, the addition state includes addition states A to C that differ in the number of AT games to be added, and by being controlled to the addition state A to C, according to a predetermined expected value for each addition state The number of AT games can be added.

[About ending control]
The ending control performed by the main control unit 41 will be described.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls the first predetermined value (1500 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous interval games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) when the AT state is controlled. 1400 games) or the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment) before the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). By establishing at least one of them, after that, regardless of the number of AT games, the AT state is continued for the period until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is established, and the advantageous section ends. Ending control (ED control) is performed to end the AT state together with the end state (ED state: a state controlled to the AT state until either end condition 1 or end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied). . Hereinafter, the state in which the AT state is controlled and the ending control is performed is referred to as the AT state (ED), and the state in which the AT state is controlled and the ending control is not performed is referred to as the AT state (normal). may be called.

Specifically, in each game controlled to the AT state, the main control unit 41 sets the number of advantageous interval games to the first predetermined value (this embodiment) based on the advantageous interval game number counter value and the net increase number counter value. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games), and whether or not the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section has exceeded a second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment). (in this embodiment, 1400 games) or that the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section exceeds a second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment). If so, an ED shift flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to indicate that the state is to be shifted to the ED state.

Then, in the games after the next game, referring to whether or not the ED transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the start of the game, based on the fact that the ED transition flag is set, the number of AT games is determined. ED control is performed to shift to the ED state regardless of the remaining number of , and the AT state is continued. The ED shift flag is included in the above-mentioned advantageous section data, and is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized by the advantageous section data initialization process. By being initialized, the ED control is terminated along with the end of the advantageous section and the AT state, and the ED state is also terminated. As a result, the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) and the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section has exceeded the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment). From the next game in which at least one of the above is established, the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) and the number of medals in the advantageous section has reached the specified number (2388 in this embodiment). ED control is performed based on the setting of the ED transition flag until the game satisfies at least one of the conditions (conditions for ending the advantageous interval), and the AT state is reached. will continue to be controlled.

Thus, in the ending control, in the AT state, the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value (this embodiment In the example, 2188 cards), on the condition that at least one of the conditions is satisfied, in the game after the condition is satisfied, regardless of the number of AT games, the end condition 1 or end condition 2 of the advantageous section ED control is performed to shift to the ED state and control is performed to continue the AT state over the period until the condition is established.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 detects when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value or when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value when the AT state is being controlled. By exceeding, ending control is performed, regardless of the number of AT games, until the end condition 1 or end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is configured to continue to control the AT state, but in the ending control, When the AT state is controlled, the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a first predetermined value, or the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds a second predetermined value. The number of AT games required to satisfy end condition 1 (the difference between the number of games in the current advantageous section and the maximum number of games), and the number of games required to satisfy condition 2 for ending the advantageous section The number of games corresponding to the difference in the specified number of games) is added to the AT game number counter, and the AT state control is continued based on the AT game number counter, so that the advantageous section end condition 1 or end condition 2 is established. The configuration may be such that the control is continued to the AT state until the time.

[Regarding ending control]
The ending-related control performed by the main control unit 41 will be described.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment updates the AT game number counter by adding the number of AT games awarded by winning the additional lottery in the AT state and the additional state as control related to the above-described ED control. In this case, it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the ED control are satisfied based on the AT game number counter value, the advantageous section game number counter value, and the net increase number counter value, and the ED control start condition is determined. When it is determined that the establishment of the AT game number counter is determined, after performing the AT game number correction process 1 for correcting the AT game number counter value, the fact that the AT game number correction process 1 has been performed and the corrected AT game number counter It is possible to perform ED-related control 1 for controlling to transmit a command whose value can be specified to the sub-controller 91 .

Specifically, in the ED-related control 1, when the AT game number counter is updated by adding the AT game number awarded by winning the extra lottery, the updated AT game number counter value and the advantageous section game The number counter value is added to calculate an additional value 1 (predicted value for the number of games in the advantageous section), and the additional value 1 is the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) that is the condition for starting the ED control described above. It is determined whether or not the above is the case, that is, whether or not the condition for starting the ED control is established by continuing the AT state based on the AT game number counter. When it is determined that the additional value 1 is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, it is determined that the conditions for starting the ED control are established, and it is determined that the additional value 1 is not equal to or greater than the first predetermined value. In this case, it is determined that the condition for starting the ED control is not established.

In addition, when the AT game number counter is updated by adding the AT game number awarded by winning the extra lottery, the average of the updated AT game number counter value and the net increase number per game in the AT state After calculating the multiplication value (predicted value of the net increase number according to the number of AT games), add the multiplication value and the net increase counter value to obtain an additional value 2 (prediction value of the net increase number in the advantageous section ), and whether or not the added value 2 exceeds the second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment) which is the condition for starting the ED control, i.e., the AT state is determined based on the AT game number counter. is continued, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the ED control is satisfied. When it is determined that the additional value 2 exceeds the second predetermined value, it is determined that the conditions for starting the ED control are satisfied, and the additional value 2 exceeds the second predetermined value. If it is determined that there is no condition, it is determined that the condition for starting the ED control is not satisfied.

In the ED-related control 1, it is determined that the conditions for starting the ED control are established based on the above-mentioned additional value 1 (scheduled number of games in the advantageous section) or additional value 2 (predicted value of the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section). If it is determined that AT game number correction processing 1 is performed.

In the AT game number correction process 1, when it is determined that the conditions for starting the ED control are established based on the additional value 1, and the AT game number correction process is performed, A subtraction value 1 (remaining number of games until the number of advantageous zone games reaches the upper limit number of games) is calculated by subtracting the advantageous zone game number counter value from the upper limit game number of the above-mentioned advantageous zone games, and the AT game number counter value is calculated. By setting the subtraction value 1 to , the AT game number counter value is corrected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the conditions for starting ED control are established based on the additional value 2, and the AT game number correction process is performed, the above-mentioned advantageous section medals After calculating the subtraction value 2 (remaining net increase number until the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number) by subtracting the net increase number counter value from the net increase number stipulated number, the subtraction value 2 is calculated per game in AT state. Calculate the division value by dividing by the average value of the number of net additions (estimated number of remaining games until the number of net additions in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (rounded up after the decimal point)), and add the AT game number counter value to the division value. By setting the value, the AT game number counter value is corrected.

Then, in the ED-related control 1, after the AT game number correction process 1 is performed to correct the AT game number counter value, a command capable of specifying the corrected AT game number is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . After that, the main control unit 41 updates the AT game number counter by subtracting 1 for each game, and then transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a command capable of specifying the updated AT game number counter value. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 uses the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 so as to display the AT game number in the later-described AT state effect (ED confirmation). Control. As a result, the sub control unit 91 can display the number of AT games so as to match the number of remaining advantageous section games, that is, the number of remaining AT games in the AT state effect (ED finalization).

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs the AT game number correction process 1 in the ED related control 1, and when it is determined that the condition for starting the ED control is satisfied, that is, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. is determined, the AT game number counter value is corrected to the number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. As a result, when the ED control start condition is satisfied, the AT game number counter value is the initial value of the ED state (the number of games from the start of ED control until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (in this embodiment, 100 games)). In addition, in a game in which the AT game number counter value is 0, that is, in a game in which the given AT game number is completely consumed and no AT game number remains, the advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 uses the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 to display the number of AT games in the AT state effect (ED confirmation) described later and Control is performed to display the number of games in the remaining advantageous section. As a result, the sub control unit 91 can display the number of AT games and the number of remaining advantageous section games so as to match the number of remaining advantageous section games in the AT state effect (ED finalization) and the ED effect. .

In addition, as ED related control 2 related to the above-described ED control, the main control unit 41 performs an operation based on the advantageous section game number counter value and the net increase number counter value in each game in which the ED control is not performed in the AT state. It is determined whether or not the condition for starting ED control has been established, and in a game in which it is determined that the condition for starting ED control has been established, the AT game number counter value is the initial value of the ED state (the value of the advantageous interval from the start of ED control). It is determined whether or not the number of games (in this embodiment, 100 games) is reached until the end condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the AT game number counter value is not the initial value, after performing AT game number correction processing 2 for correcting by setting the initial value of the ED state to the AT game number counter value, the AT game It is possible to perform control so as to transmit to the sub-controller 91 a command indicating that the number correction process 2 has been performed and a command capable of specifying the AT game number counter value after correction.

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs the AT game number correction process 2 in the ED related control 2, so that when the conditions for starting the ED control are satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. Secondly, the AT game number counter value is corrected to the initial value of the ED state, that is, the number of games until the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. As a result, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the AT game number counter value becomes 0, and in the game in which the given AT game number is completely consumed and there is no remaining AT game number, Advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 controls to display the number of remaining advantageous section games in the ED effect, which will be described later, using the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 . As a result, the sub-control unit 91 can display the number of games in the remaining advantageous interval so as to match the number of games in the remaining advantageous interval in the ED effect.

[Regarding the control flow of the AT-related control state by the main control unit and the control flow of the AT-related effect by the sub-control unit]
The control flow of the AT-related control state by the main control unit and the control flow of the AT-related effect by the sub-control unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27. FIG.

First, the main control unit and the sub-control unit when the AT state (normal) is terminated without the ED control being performed because the conditions for performing the ED control are not satisfied while the AT state (normal) is being controlled. (see FIG. 24), and the flow of control of the main control unit and sub-control unit (see FIG. 25) when the conditions for performing ED control are established in the AT state (normal) and ED control is performed. do.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the non-AT state, the AT lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. hold a lottery. Then, when the AT lottery is won and it is determined that the AT state (normal) is to be shifted, the AT game number (winning value) awarded by winning the AT lottery is counted in the AT game number counter. set. After that, the state is shifted to the precursor state, and after a predetermined number of games have passed, the state is shifted to the AT state (normal). Further, when shifting to the precursor state, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a command that can specify that the transition to the precursor state is to be performed, and when shifting to the AT state (normal), the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 It transmits to the sub-controller 91 a command that can be specified to shift to the state (normal).

On the other hand, when it is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that the sub-control unit 91 will shift to the precursor state, the sub-control unit 91 changes the presentation mode to the non-AT state on the main control unit 41 side. The normal effect (see, for example, FIG. 39(d)) which is mainly performed when being controlled is shifted to the portent effect (not shown) which is performed when being controlled in the portent state. Further, when a shift to the AT state (normal) is specified based on a command received from the main control unit 41, the main control unit 41 side controls the effect mode from the precursor effect to the AT state (normal). The AT state effect (normal) (see, for example, FIG. 28(a)) performed when the state is being performed is shifted to. As will be described later, in the AT state effect (normal), the number of AT games is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the remaining number of AT games.

After shifting to the AT state (normal), the main control unit 41 subtracts 1 from the AT game number counter value at the start of each game. On the other hand, when the AT game number counter value is 1 or more, the AT state is continued in the next game. . Further, when the AT state is controlled, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. .

In each game controlled in the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval game number counter is incremented by 1 at the start of the game (see FIG. 14), and the advantageous interval game number counter value reaches the upper limit number of games at the end of the game. 15, ie, whether or not the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied (see FIG. 15). Further, at the end of each game controlled in the advantageous interval, the net increase number counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payout medals in the game, and whether or not the value of the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number is determined. It is determined whether or not the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied (see FIG. 15). Then, when at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the advantageous section data, thereby ending the advantageous section and the AT state. Let Further, when controlling to the advantageous interval, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the number of advantageous interval games specified based on the advantageous interval game number counter is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, At the end of each game, a command capable of specifying the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section specified based on the net increase number counter is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

Further, the main control unit 41 determines whether the remaining number of AT games becomes 0 based on the AT game number counter, when the advantageous interval end condition 1 is satisfied, or when the advantageous interval end condition 2 is satisfied. During the period until the above condition is established, that is, during the period when the control is in the advantageous section and in the AT state, the internal lottery determines the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, the small combination 1 to 6 in order of pushing). In the winning game, navigation notification is controlled, the navigation number corresponding to the winning navigation target role is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command capable of specifying the navigation number is sent to the sub-control section 91. Send to

On the other hand, when the fact that the navigation target role has been won and the navigation number notified by the navigation notification are specified based on the command received from the main control section 41, the sub-control section 91 performs the navigation effect and performs the navigation. A navigation image corresponding to the notified navigation number is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation number. In the navigation effect performed when the AT state effect (normal) control is being performed, as described later, the effect mode lottery is performed to determine whether the navigation effect is to be performed in the first mode or the second mode. A navigation image corresponding to the effect mode (first mode or second mode) determined by the effect mode lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

Further, the main control unit 41 controls to the advantageous section and controls to the AT state, the internal lottery for the additional lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the pushing order small combination 1-6, the In games where a small win 1, a specific small win 2, and a replay win 1) are won, an additional lottery is conducted, and if the additional lottery is won, the number of AT games awarded by winning is added to the AT game number counter. to add. Then, the sum of the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter after the winning AT game number is added and the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is , determines whether or not it is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value which is a condition for performing the above-described ED control. Then, when it is determined that the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, ED control is performed to indicate that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed. A fixed flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and control in the AT state (normal) is continued (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, when it is determined that the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous section games is not equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the AT state (normal) control is continued without setting the ED transition confirmation flag. (See FIG. 24).

In addition, when the additional lottery is performed, the main control unit 41 sends a command that can specify the fact that the additional lottery has been performed and the result of the lottery (for example, the number of AT games awarded, etc.) to the sub-control unit 91. Send to Further, when the ED transition confirmation flag is set, a command that can specify that the ED transition confirmation flag has been set is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

On the other hand, when it is specified that an additional lottery has been performed based on a command received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 generates an additional effect suggesting the result of the additional lottery as described later. (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

As shown in FIG. 24, it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41. However, if it is not specified that the ED transition confirmation flag has been set, an operation to be described later is performed. An operation request effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a request effect is performed, and when the operation request effect lottery is won, at the end of the game (for example, when the third reel is stopped) ) to prompt the operation of the switch 56 for effect. When a performance switch 56 is operated in a state where an operation request performance is being performed with the winning of the operation request performance lottery as a trigger, the AT state performance (normal) is resumed without performing the ED shift confirmation suggestion performance to be described later. Further, when the lottery for operation request performance is not won, the AT state performance (normal) is resumed after finishing the additional performance without performing the operation request performance.

Then, when the remaining number of AT games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 becomes 3 or less while the AT state effect (normal) is being performed, an end suggestion notification, which will be described later, is given. 1 is performed, and the fact that the AT state is terminated is notified using the AT game number display before the AT state is terminated.

The main control unit 41 controls the AT state (normal) at the end of a game in which it is specified that the remaining number of AT games has become 0 based on the AT game counter. ) and transition to the non-AT state.

In response to this, the sub control unit 91 performs an AT state result notification, which will be described later, at the end of the game when the remaining number of AT games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 becomes 0. , the game results in the AT state (the number of medals paid out in the AT state, the number of games controlled in the AT state, etc.). Then, when the start operation of the next game is performed (for example, the start switch 7 is operated with the prescribed number of bets set, etc.), the AT state result notification is terminated and the normal effect is performed. to control.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when it is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that the ED transition confirmation flag has been set, the game is terminated at the end of the game (for example, the third reel When the stop operation is performed), an operation request effect is performed. Then, when the effect switch 56 is operated while the operation request effect is being performed, an ED transition confirmation suggesting effect, which will be described later, is performed to indicate that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed (see FIG. 41 ( a) to (d)). In this way, the operation request effect may be executed both when the transition to the ED state is confirmed and when the transition to the ED state is not confirmed. This suggests the possibility that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed by performing the operation request effect. As will be described later, when the operation request effect is being performed, the AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games is not performed.

Then, when the next game start operation is performed, the sub control unit 91 ends the ED shift confirmation suggestion effect, and the main control unit 41 side starts the ED control and shifts to the ED state. Over a period of time, control is performed to perform an AT state effect (ED confirmation) indicating that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed (see FIGS. 41(d) and 41(e)). In the AT state production (ED confirmation), as described later, the number of AT games is displayed to suggest the remaining number of AT games, and the ED confirmation suggestion display is performed to indicate that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed. It is designed to be

Further, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the navigation target role has been won based on the command received from the main control unit 41 during the period during which the AT state effect (ED determination) is being performed, and the navigation number notified by the navigation notification. When specified, a navigation effect is performed. When the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is performed, the navigation effect is not performed in the second mode, but the navigation effect is performed in the first mode.

The main control unit 41 terminates the game when the number of advantageous interval games identified based on the advantageous interval game number counter reaches a first predetermined value in a state of control in the AT state (normal). At the same time, an ED shift flag that can specify that the state is to be shifted to the ED state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a command that can be specified that the state is to be shifted to the ED state is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . Then, ED control is started on condition that the ED shift flag is set at the start of the next game of the game. Starting the ED control causes a transition from the AT state (normal) to the AT state (ED). The ED transition flag is referenced at the start of each subsequent game, and the ED control is continued on the condition that the ED transition flag is set.

In the ED control, the advantageous interval end condition 1 is established when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the maximum number of games, and the net increase in the advantageous interval specified based on the net increase counter exceeds the specified number. The AT state (ED) is controlled to continue until at least one of the end conditions 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. Further, control is performed so that navigation notification is performed in a game in which a navigation target role is won by an internal lottery.

It should be noted that, although not shown in particular, it is also possible to specify that the net increase number in the advantageous section specified based on the net increase number counter exceeds the second predetermined value in the AT state (normal) control state. , the ED transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, ED control is started, and the AT state (normal) is changed from the AT state ( ED). A game in which the AT state (ED) is continued until at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the navigation target role is won by an internal lottery. Control to perform navigation notification in.

In addition, in the ED control, a command that can specify that the ED control is being performed, the remaining number of games until the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the remaining net increase number until the end condition 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied An identifiable command is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

In response to this, the sub-control unit 91 performs an ED start suggestion effect, which will be described later, at the end of the game for which it is specified that the transition to the ED state is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, and the next game is performed. It suggests that the ED control is performed more and the state is shifted to the AT state (ED). Then, when the next game of the game is started, the ED start suggesting performance is ended and the ED performance described later is started to suggest that the AT state (ED) is being controlled.

During the ED effect, an end condition notification, which will be described later, is performed, and the number of remaining games until the advantageous interval end condition 1 specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is satisfied and the advantageous interval end condition 2 are determined. By displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 the number of remaining net increases until the condition is met, it is suggested that the condition for ending the advantageous section is about to be met.

Also, in the state where the ED effect is being performed, the number of games until the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit number of games based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment). After it is specified that the advantageous section and the AT state are to be terminated, prior notification of termination, which will be described later, is performed during the period until the advantageous section is terminated.

It should be noted that, although not shown in particular, in the state where the ED effect is being performed, the net increase in the number of net increases in the advantageous section exceeds a second predetermined value based on commands received from the main control unit 41, and the number of net increases is less than a predetermined number (for example, , less than 10), the same as when it is specified that the number of games until the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games becomes the predetermined number of games. During the period until the end of the AT state, a prior end notification, which will be described later, is performed to notify that the advantageous section and the AT state will be ended.

The main control unit 41 detects that the number of advantageous interval games specified based on the advantageous interval game number counter has reached the upper limit number of games, and based on the net increase number counter, in the AT state (DE) state. At the end of the game in which at least one of the cases where the net increase in the number of sheets in the specified advantageous section exceeds the specified number is established, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and the advantageous section is terminated. Terminate the AT state (ED) and transition to the non-AT state. At the end of the game, the advantageous interval data initialization process is performed, and a command capable of specifying that the advantageous interval has ended is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs the advantageous interval data initialization processing based on the command received from the main control unit 41, and at the end of the game in which it is specified that the advantageous interval and the AT state are ended. , AT state result notification, which will be described later, is performed to notify the game results in the AT state (the number of medals paid out in the AT state, the number of games controlled in the AT state, etc.). Then, when the start operation of the next game is performed (for example, the start switch 7 is operated with the prescribed number of bets set, etc.), the AT state result notification is terminated and the normal effect is performed. to control.

Further, at the end of the game in which the end of the advantageous section and the AT state is specified, the immersion prevention notification described later and the post-completion notification described later are performed. Signals that the state has been terminated. After that, the addiction prevention notification is terminated on the condition that a predetermined period of time (three seconds or more in this embodiment) has elapsed, and post-termination notification is performed on the condition that a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment) has elapsed. terminate.

Next, the flow of control of the main control unit and the sub-control unit when the condition for performing ED control is not satisfied during control to the added state and the added state is ended without ED control being performed ( 26), and the flow of control of the main control section and the sub-control section (see FIG. 27) when the conditions for performing ED control are established in the added state and ED control is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, when the main control unit 41 is controlling to the advantageous section and controlling to the AT state (normal), the additional state lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. By doing so, an additional state lottery is performed. Then, when it is determined that the addition state lottery is won and the transition to the addition state A to C is made, a predetermined number of games corresponding to the determined addition state is added to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the state game number counter, and after that, when a predetermined number of games has passed, it is shifted to the winning extra states A to C.例文帳に追加In addition, when winning the extra state lottery, the number of AT games won by the extra state lottery is added to the AT game number counter, thereby increasing the number of AT games.

In addition, the main control unit 41, when shifting to the additional states A to C, specifies the effect of shifting to the additional state, the additional states A to C to be shifted, and the number of AT games to be won and added by the additional state lottery. A possible command is sent to the sub-controller 91 .

On the other hand, when it is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that the sub-control unit 91 is to shift to the additional state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the additional state effects A to C corresponding to the additional state A to C to be shifted. Control to perform C. As will be described later, the additional state effects A to C are effects with different effects (see FIG. 30), and the type of the added state being controlled can be specified based on the effect mode. As will be described later, in addition state effects A to C, AT state effects (normal) do not display the AT game number indicating the remaining number of AT games on the liquid crystal display 51 .

After transitioning to the added states A to C, the main control unit 41 subtracts 1 from the added state game number counter value at the start of each game, and if the added state game number counter value is 1 or more, , control to continue the added state in the next game. On the other hand, if the added state game number counter value after decrementing by 1 is not equal to or greater than 1, the added state is ended and the state is shifted to the AT state (normal) at the end of the game. Further, when the control is in the add-on state, at the start of each game, a command capable of specifying the remaining number of add-on games specified based on the add-on game number counter is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. .

Also, even when the control is in the added state, in each game, 1 is added to the number-of-advantage-section game counter at the start of the game (see FIG. 14), as in the case of the AT state (normal). , at the end of each game controlled in the advantageous interval, the net increase number counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payout medals in the game. Then, when it is specified that at least one of the advantageous interval game number counter value and the net increase number counter value is satisfied, the advantageous interval end condition 1 and the end condition 2 are satisfied, and when the game is ended, it is advantageous. Section data initialization processing is performed to end the advantageous section and AT state.

Also, even when the control is in the added state, the number of advantageous interval games specified based on the advantageous interval game number counter is specified at the start of each game, as in the case of the AT state (normal) control. A possible command is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and at the end of each game, a command capable of specifying the net increase in medals in the advantageous section specified based on the net increase counter is transmitted to the sub-controller 91.

Further, the main control unit 41 determines that the remaining number of added state games is 0 based on the added state game number counter, that the advantageous interval end condition 1 is satisfied, and that the advantageous interval end condition 2 is satisfied. is established, that is, during the period in which the control is in the advantageous section and in the additional state, the internal lottery determines the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6 ) is won, navigation notification is controlled, the navigation number corresponding to the winning navigation target role is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command that can specify the navigation number is sub-controlled. It is transmitted to the unit 91 .

On the other hand, when the fact that the navigation target role has been won and the navigation number notified by the navigation notification are specified based on the command received from the main control section 41, the sub-control section 91 performs the navigation effect and performs the navigation. A navigation image corresponding to the notified navigation number is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the navigation number. In the navigation effect that is performed when controlling the additional state effect, the effect mode lottery is performed in the same way as the navigation effect that is performed when the AT state effect (normal) control is performed, and the effect mode lottery is determined. A navigation image corresponding to the rendered effect mode (first mode or second mode) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and the additional lottery target combination in the internal lottery (in this embodiment, the pushing order small combination 1 to 6, specified In games where a small win 1, a specific small win 2, and a replay win 1) are won, an additional lottery is conducted, and if the additional lottery is won, the number of AT games awarded by winning is added to the AT game number counter. to add. Then, the sum of the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number counter after the winning AT game number is added and the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter is , determines whether or not it is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value which is a condition for performing the above-described ED control. Then, when it is determined that the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous section games is not equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the control of the added state is continued without setting the ED transition confirmation flag (FIG. 26). reference). On the other hand, when it is determined that the sum of the remaining number of AT games and the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, the ED transition confirmation flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the game ends, Terminate the add-on state and shift to the AT state (normal) (see FIG. 27).

In addition, when the additional lottery is performed, the main control unit 41 sends a command that can specify the fact that the additional lottery has been performed and the result of the lottery (for example, the number of AT games awarded, etc.) to the sub-control unit 91. Send to Further, when the ED transition confirmation flag is set, a command that can specify that the ED transition confirmation flag has been set is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

On the other hand, when it is specified that an additional lottery has been performed based on a command received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 generates an additional effect suggesting the result of the additional lottery as described later. (See FIGS. 26 and 27).

As shown in FIG. 26, it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, but if it is not specified that the ED transition confirmation flag has been set, an operation to be described later is performed. An operation request effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute a request effect is performed, and if the operation request effect lottery is won, at the end of the game (for example, when the third reel is stopped) When (time), an operation request effect is performed to prompt the operation of the effect switch 56.例文帳に追加When the performance switch 56 is operated in a state where the operation request performance is being performed with the winning of the operation request performance lottery as a trigger, the addition state performance is resumed without performing the ED shift confirmation suggestion performance to be described later. Further, when the lottery for operation request performance is not won, the addition state performance is restarted after finishing the additional performance without performing the operation request performance.

When the number of remaining games in the added state specified based on the command received from the main control part 41 becomes 3 or less while the added state performance is being performed, the end suggestion notification 2 is performed. In the end suggestion notification 2, a suggestion display suggesting the remaining number of added games is performed (for example, a message image including a number image indicating the number of added games, such as "more games after the added state," etc.) is displayed, Before the end of the added state, the fact that the added state is terminated is notified.

The main control unit 41 terminates the add-on state at the end of the game in which the remaining number of add-on state games becomes 0 based on the add-on state game number counter while controlling the add-on state. to shift to the AT state (normal).

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the result of the additional state, which will be described later, at the end of the game when the remaining number of the additional state games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 becomes 0. Then, the game result in the added state (the total number of AT games given in the added state, etc.) is reported. Then, when the start operation of the next game is performed (for example, the start switch 7 is operated with the specified number of bets set), the addition state result notification is terminated and the AT state (normal) is performed. (see FIGS. 42(a) to (d)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, when it is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that the ED shift determination flag has been set, the game is terminated at the end of the game (for example, the third reel When the stop operation is performed), the addition state presentation is terminated and the operation request presentation is performed. Then, when the effect switch 56 is operated while the operation request effect is being performed, an ED transition confirmation suggesting effect, which will be described later, is performed to indicate that the transition to the ED state has been confirmed (see FIG. 43 ( a) to (d)). In this way, even when the main control unit 41 side is controlling to the additional state, similarly to when it is being controlled to the AT state (normal), when it is determined that the state will be shifted to the ED state. Also, even if it is not confirmed that the game will move to the ED state, the operation request effect may be executed. It suggests the possibility that it has been confirmed that

When the next game start operation is performed, the sub-control unit 91 terminates the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect (see FIGS. 43(d) and 43(e)). After that, as in the case where the ED control is performed from the AT state (normal) as described above, the AT state effect is performed over the period from the start of the ED control on the main control unit 41 side until the transition to the ED state. (ED confirmation) is performed. In this way, when it is specified that the ED shift confirmation flag is set while the additional state effect is being performed, after the additional state effect is terminated and the operation request effect is performed, the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed. , and shifts to the AT state production (ED determination), and the addition state result notification is not performed.

The main control unit 41 confirms that the addition state is to be shifted to the ED state, terminates the addition state, and shifts to the AT state (normal). When the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the first predetermined value, the state is shifted to the AT state (ED), and after that, the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games. At least one of the advantageous interval ending condition 1 established in and the advantageous interval ending condition 2 established when the net increase number of the advantageous interval specified based on the net increase counter exceeds the specified number is satisfied , the advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and the advantageous section and the AT state are terminated.

Although not shown, it is specified that the net increase number in the advantageous section specified based on the net increase number counter exceeds the second predetermined value after the addition state is ended and the AT state (normal) is entered. Also, in the same way as when it is specified that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the first predetermined value, the state is shifted to the AT state (ED), and then at least one of the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section When either one of them is established, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and the advantageous section and the AT state are terminated. In addition, even in the AT state (normal) that is controlled after the addition state is terminated, control is performed so that the navigation notification is performed in the game in which the navigation target role is won by the internal lottery.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 confirms that the shift to the ED state is made in the added state, and after starting the AT state effect (ED confirmation), the ED state is changed from the AT state (normal) as described above. In the same way as when it is determined that the transition to the AT state (ED) is made, when the main control unit 41 side shifts to the AT state (ED), the ED start suggesting effect is performed, and then the AT state (ED) is controlled. ED production, termination condition notification, and termination pre-notification are performed during the period.

Then, the advantageous interval end condition 1 is established when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, and the advantageous interval is established when the net increase in the advantageous interval specified based on the net increase counter exceeds the specified number. AT state result notification and post-end notification are performed for a predetermined period from the end of the game when at least one of the end conditions 2 of (1) is established, and control is made to shift to normal presentation.

[About AT state production (normal)]
The AT state rendering (normal) performed by the sub-controller 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG.

The AT state effect (normal) is a effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 when the main control unit 41 is controlling the AT state (normal). By doing so, it suggests that it is controlled to the AT state (normal).

As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, in the AT state (normal), the AT state effect image (normal) (in this embodiment, the image of character A) and the AT state normal background image (in this embodiment, The image of the celestial body A and outer space) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 . The AT state normal background image is an image different from the background image used in the AT state effect (ED confirmed) and the ED effect described later, and when the AT state normal background image is displayed, the AT state A player or the like can recognize that an effect (normal) is being performed.

Also, when the AT state (normal) is being performed, the AT game number display indicates the AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, that is, the remaining number of the given AT game number. (In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display a message image of "number of remaining AT games" and a numerical image indicating the remaining number of AT games (for example, "100 games").

When the number of remaining AT games is greater than the predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment), the number of AT games is displayed in a normal mode (non-blinking mode), and the remaining number of AT games is displayed in the predetermined number of games. When the number is equal to or less than the number (three games in this embodiment), it is displayed in an AT end suggesting mode (red flashing mode in this embodiment). By displaying the number of AT games in a mode suggesting the end of AT, the fact that the number of remaining AT games is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games and that the conditions for ending the AT state (that the number of AT games is 0) are nearing completion. is designed to suggest

In addition, in the AT state (normal), an AT game history image (in this embodiment, a number image indicating the number of games controlled to the AT state (the number of games played during AT), and a net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (AT A number image showing the medium net increase number) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the game history during the AT (the number of AT games and the net increase number).

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 can perform the navigation effect when the main control unit 41 performs the navigation notification, and when the AT state effect (normal) is being performed, the navigation effect is the first. It is possible to perform in either one of the first mode (see FIG. 28(a)) and the second mode (FIG. 28(b)) different from the first mode.

The presentation mode of the navigation presentation performed when the AT state presentation (normal) is performed is determined to be either the first mode or the second mode by a presentation mode lottery. In the production mode lottery, if it is not decided to shift to the additional state when performing the navigation production, the ratio is higher than the case where it is decided to shift to the additional state from the second mode. Also, it is determined that the navigation effect is to be performed in the first mode, and if it is determined to shift to the added state when performing the navigation effect, it is determined to shift to the added state. It is determined that the navigation effect is performed in the second mode rather than in the first mode at a higher rate than when it is not performed. As a result, when the navigation effect is performed in the second mode, the AT state is extended by adding the possibility that the transition to the additional state is decided, that is, the number of AT games, compared to when the navigation effect is performed in the first mode. It is suggested that there is a high possibility that In the navigation performance, the performance mode is determined by the performance mode lottery when the navigation performance is performed, so that even if the same navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, the first mode is selected according to the result of the performance mode lottery. In some cases, the navigation effect is performed in , and in other cases, the navigation effect is performed in the second mode.

As described above, the sub-control part 91 can suggest the result of the additional lottery by performing the additional lottery when winning the extra lottery while the AT state performance (normal) is being performed.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the additional effect performed when the AT state effect (normal) is performed, an additional suggestive image (normal) (a message image indicating the number of given AT games (for example, "+100 Get !!" etc.)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the number of AT games awarded as a result of the additional lottery. When the addition suggestive image (normal) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the number of AT games is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The display of the number of AT games is updated so that the number of AT games won in the addition lottery suggested by the addition suggestion image (normal) is added.

[Regarding the added state effect]
The added state rendering performed by the sub-control section 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 34. FIG.

The added state effect is an effect performed by the sub-controller 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 when the main control unit 41 is controlling the added state. By performing the added state effect, the added state is controlled. suggest that

As shown in FIG. 30, the add-on state includes add-on states A to C with different expected values for the number of AT games that can be added on, and the add-on state effects A to C with different effects modes are included in the add-on state effects. is included. The sub-control section 91 performs an additional state effect according to the type of the additional state controlled by the main control section 41 side. That is, when the main control part 41 side controls to the added state A, it controls to perform the added state performance A, and when it is controlled to the added state B, it controls to perform the added state performance B, and the added state performance B is performed. When it is controlled to the state C, it is controlled to perform the additional state performance C. - 特許庁

The added state effect A is an added state effect image A in a manner different from the effect images in the above-described AT state effect and the added state effects C and B (in this embodiment, an image in which characters A and B face each other, FIG. 31 ( (see a), (b), and (c)), and an added state background image A (in this embodiment, an image of a plurality of effect lines, 31 (a), (b), and (c)), an additional suggestive image A in a manner different from the additional suggestive images in the above-described AT state effects and the additional state effects C and B (in the present embodiment, the AT game provided A message image suggesting a number (“For example, win +500 Get!!”, etc., see FIG. 31(c)) and an additional state result image A in a mode different from the additional state result suggestive images in the additional state effects C and B (In this embodiment, the image of the character A and the message image suggesting the total number of AT games given in the added state A (for example, "Total +800 Get!!" etc.), see FIG. 32) I do.

In addition, the added state effect A is ended when the added state A ends. (The sum of the remaining number of AT games identified based on the AT game number counter and the number of advantageous section games identified based on the advantageous section game number counter is the first predetermined number.) is reached).

The added state effect B is an added state effect image B (in this embodiment, an image in which the character A is riding a disc, shown in FIG. 33 ( (see a), (b), and (c)), and an additional state background image A (in this embodiment, an image of a celestial body B and outer space, (see FIGS. 33(a), (b), and (c)), an additional suggestive image B in a manner different from the additional suggestive images in the above-described AT state effects and the additional state effects A and C (in this embodiment, the AT game provided A message image suggesting a number (“For example, +200 Get!!” etc.) and a star-shaped frame image, see FIG. Added state result image B (in this embodiment, an image of character A and a message image suggesting the total number of AT games given in the added state B (for example, "Total + 500 Get !!" etc.) and a star A frame image (see FIG. 34) is used to produce an effect.

Further, the added state effect B is ended when the added state B ends, and the predetermined number of added state games (in this embodiment, 10 games) has passed, or the ED (The sum of the remaining number of AT games identified based on the AT game number counter and the number of advantageous section games identified based on the advantageous section game number counter is the first predetermined number.) is reached).

The add-on state effect B includes an add-on state effect image C (not shown) in a manner different from the effect images in the AT state effect and the add-on state effects A and B described above, and the background in the AT state effect and the add-on state effects A and B described above. An add-on state background image C (not shown) in a manner different from the image, an add-on suggestive image C (not shown) in a manner different from the add-on suggestive images in the AT state effects and the add-on state effects A and B described above, and an add-on state effect An effect is performed using an additional state result image C (not shown) in a mode different from the additional state result suggestive images in A and B.

Further, the added state effect C is terminated when the added state C ends. (The sum of the remaining number of AT games identified based on the AT game number counter and the number of advantageous section games identified based on the advantageous section game number counter is the first predetermined number.) is reached).

In addition state productions A to C, the number of AT games indicating the remaining number of AT games is not displayed, and the display during the addition state indicating that the addition state is being controlled (in this embodiment, "Chance !”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

Further, when the additional state effects A to C are performed, if the navigation target role is won by the internal lottery and the main control unit 41 side performs the navigation notification, the navigation effect is performed in the first mode. .

[About the operation request effect]
The operation request rendering performed by the sub-controller 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

The operation request effect is an effect requesting the player to operate the effect switch 56 . As shown in FIG. 35, the sub-control unit 91 displays an operation request image (in this embodiment, an image of the effect switch 56 and a message image suggesting that the effect switch 56 is pressed down) in the operation request effect. For example, "Push!" etc.)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the reception of operation by the effect switch 56 is validated to wait. In this state, the operation request effect is terminated when the operation by pressing the effect switch 56 is detected.

Further, when the operation request effect is performed, the number of AT games is not displayed, and the remaining number of AT games is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.例文帳に追加

[About ED transition confirmation production]
The ED transition confirmation suggestion effect performed by the sub-controller 91 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 .

As a result of winning the AT state (normal) or in the additional state by the addition lottery and giving the number of AT games, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the first predetermined number, which is the condition for starting the ED control. ED control is performed when it is determined that at least one of the number of sheets reached and that the net increase number counter exceeds the second predetermined value, which is the condition for starting ED control, and that ED control is performed. This is an effect suggesting that it is confirmed that the player will be moved to the ED state. As described above, since the ED control is performed and the AT state is controlled until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 performs the ED control including the ED shift confirmation suggestion effect. In the production (ED transition confirmation suggestion production, AT state production (ED confirmation), ED confirmation suggestion display, ED production, ED suggestion display), it is suggested that ED control is performed and controlled to the ED state, and an advantageous section , and further suggests that the advantageous section and the AT state are terminated when the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the ED transition confirmation suggesting effect, an ED transition confirmation suggesting image (in this embodiment, an image of character A and a message image suggesting that ending control is performed (for example, "Ending Get!!") ), etc.) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that ED control is performed and the transition to the ED state is confirmed.

Further, when the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, the number of AT games is not displayed, and the remaining number of AT games is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. - 特許庁

[About AT state production (ED confirmation)]
The AT state rendering (ED determination) performed by the sub-controller 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

The AT state effect (ED confirmation) is when the advantageous section game number counter reaches a first predetermined value, which is the condition for starting ED control, and when the net increase number counter exceeds a second predetermined value, which is the condition for starting ED control. This is an effect suggesting that the AT state continues until at least one of them is established, that is, until the ED control is performed and the state is shifted to the ED state. The AT state effect (ED confirmed) is the result of the advantageous section game number counter reaching a first predetermined value and the net increase number counter exceeding a second predetermined value after the above-mentioned ED transition confirmation suggesting effect is performed. It is carried out for a period until at least one of them is established.

As shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, in the AT state effect (ED confirmed), the AT state effect image (ED confirmed) (in this embodiment, the image of character A) and the background image suggesting ED transition confirmation (this In the embodiment, the image of the celestial body C and outer space) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 . The ED transition confirmation background image is an image different from the background image used in the above-mentioned AT state production (normal), the additional state productions A to C, and the ED production described later, and the ED transition confirmation suggestion background. By displaying the image, the player or the like can recognize that the AT state effect (ED determination) is being performed.

Further, when the AT state presentation (ED determination) is being performed, ED shift pre-notification is performed to notify before the ED control is started that the ED control is performed after that and the shift to the ED state is performed. ED transition prior notification is performed when the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is started when it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value. indicates the number of games remaining until the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value, and the transition to the ED state and the start of the ED effect (ending) due to the lapse of the remaining number of games. An ED confirmation suggesting display image (in this embodiment, a character image of "1006 more games until the start of the ending!") including a message image to suggest the conditions until the transition to the ED state is made. Among the ED confirmation indication display images, the number image indicating the number of remaining games until the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value is updated so that the number of remaining games is counted down at the start of each game (Fig. 36(a) and (b)), in the game in which the number of advantageous interval games has reached the first predetermined value, that is, in the game one game before the ED control is performed, there are 0 games left until the transition to the ED state. is displayed.

In addition, the ED transition prior notification is performed when the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is started, triggered by the confirmation that the net increase number counter value exceeds the second predetermined value. , indicates the number image indicating the remaining net increase number until the net increase number counter value exceeds the second predetermined value, and indicating that the ED state will be transitioned to and the ED effect (ending) will start due to the lapse of the remaining number of games. An ED confirmation suggesting display image (for example, a character image such as "1006 sheets left until the ending starts!") including a message image to suggest the conditions until the transition to the ED state is made.

In addition, in the AT state effect (ED confirmation), as in the AT state (normal), the remaining number of games until the advantageous section ends, and the AT game number display (this In the embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display a message image of "the number of remaining AT games" and a numerical image indicating the remaining number of AT games (for example, "1106 games"). The number of AT games given (the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous section) is specified based on the AT game number counter value included in the command received from the main control unit 41 . In the AT game number display, by displaying the AT game number specified based on the AT game number counter value, the remaining AT game number including the number of games during the ED control period is displayed. , and the remaining number of AT games specified based on the AT game number display is compared to the remaining number of AT games specified based on the ED shift advance notification (the number of games until ED control is started) As a result, the number of games during the ED control is increased (100 games in this embodiment).

The number of AT games may be displayed by displaying the number of remaining AT games counted by the main control section 41 or by displaying the number of remaining AT games counted by the sub-control section 91 .

Further, when the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is being performed, if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery and the main control unit 41 side performs the navigation notification, the navigation effect is performed in the first mode. (See FIG. 37(a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 37(c), in the AT state effect (ED confirmation), when the AT state effect (ED confirmation) ends, that is, when the ED control is started, an ED start suggesting effect is performed. , an image suggesting the start of the ED (in this embodiment, an image of character A and a message image indicating that the ED control is to be started (e.g., "Ending Start") is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the ED control is started. suggest that

[About ED production]
The ED effects performed by the sub-controller 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. FIG.

In the ED effect, the ED control is performed and the transition to the ED state is performed, and the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games, which is the condition for ending the advantageous section. This is an effect suggesting that the AT state continues until at least one of exceeding a specified number of sheets is established.

As shown in FIGS. 38A, 38B, and 38C, in the ED effect, an ED effect image (in this embodiment, an image in which character A is riding a rocket) and an ED background image (in this embodiment, a celestial body C and an image of outer space) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 . The ED background image is an image of a mode different from the background images used in the aforementioned AT state effect (normal), AT state effect (ED confirmed), and additional state effects A to C, and the ED background image is displayed. By doing so, the player or the like can recognize that the ED control is started.

By performing the ED effect, it is suggested that the ED control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and is controlled to the ED state, and the number of advantageous section games is set to the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment). ) indicates that the advantageous section ending condition 1 is about to be satisfied, and the advantageous section ending condition indicates that the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2188 medals in this embodiment). It suggests that the establishment of 2 is near.

In this embodiment, the ED state is controlled by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 an effect image or a background image different from the AT state effect (normal) or the AT state effect (ED confirmed) in the ED effect. However, in the ED effect, by displaying a video or image specific to the ED state, for example, an animation video related to the content corresponding to the model of the slot machine 1, the ED state is displayed. A configuration that suggests

As shown in FIGS. 38(a) and 38(c), in the ED effect, the number of games remaining in the advantageous interval is the number of games remaining until the end of the advantageous interval. is displayed on the device 51. The number of remaining games (the number of AT games given) until the end of the advantageous interval is specified based on the AT game number counter value included in the command received from the main control unit 41 . In the display of the number of remaining advantageous section games, when the ED effect is performed when the advantageous section game number counter reaches the first predetermined value which is the condition for starting the ED control, "the number of remaining ED games" is displayed. message image and a number image (for example, "99 games") indicating the number of games in the remaining advantageous section are displayed. In the display of the number of games in the remaining advantageous section, the number image indicating the number of games in the remaining advantageous section is updated so as to count down each time a game is played. In the remaining advantageous interval game number display, the number of AT games specified based on the corrected AT game number counter value specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 is displayed, so the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied. When doing so, it is possible to display that the number of remaining advantageous section games is 0, and despite displaying that the number of remaining advantageous section games (number of AT games given) is 1 or more, Advantageous sections are not terminated.

In the display of the number of remaining advantageous interval games, the number of remaining AT games counted by the main control unit 41 (the number of remaining advantageous interval games) may be displayed, or the number of remaining AT games counted by the sub-control unit 91 ( The number of games in the remaining advantageous section) may be displayed.

On the other hand, when the ED effect is performed when the net increase number counter exceeds the second predetermined value, which is the condition for starting the ED control, a character image that does not indicate a specific numerical value (for example, "?" image) is replaced with a numerical image indicating the number of remaining advantageous interval games (not shown). When the ED effect is performed when the number of medal net increases exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games until the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied is uncertain, so the remaining advantageous By not displaying a specific numerical value as the number of games in the remaining advantageous interval in the number of interval games display, the number of remaining advantageous interval games suggested by the display of the number of remaining advantageous interval games and the number of remaining advantageous interval games actually controlled It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the occurrence of inconsistency.

In addition, in the display of the number of games in the remaining advantageous section, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value as a trigger, even when the ED effect is being performed, the number of medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value. Triggered by, even when the ED effect is being performed, the number of games or the estimated number of games until the end condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied may be displayed, or until the end condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied A configuration in which the number of games is not displayed may also be used.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the ED effect, an ED suggestion display (in this embodiment, a character image of "Congratulations!") that suggests that the ED control is being performed is displayed in the remaining advantageous interval game. It can be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 where the message image of "the number of remaining ED games" is displayed in the number display. The ED suggestive display is controlled by blinking display by alternately switching between a display state and a non-display state at predetermined time intervals. In the display of the number of games in the remaining advantageous section, the message image of "the number of remaining ED games" is displayed in the area where the message image is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 38(b), in the ED effect, an end condition for notifying that the advantageous section ends when the favorable section end condition (at least one of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2) is met. Notification can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 . In the end condition notification, the number of games image showing the difference between the number of games in the current advantageous section and the upper limit number of games (for example, a character image of "099 more games") and the number of medals added in the current advantageous section and the specified number of medals (for example, a text image of "acquire 292 more medals"), and that the game is played for the number of games of the difference, or the number of medals net increase is increased by the number of the difference By doing so, a character image (in this embodiment, a character image of "advantageous section limiter fixed") indicating that the advantageous section ends is included. In the termination condition notification, the game number image, the number image, and the character image are displayed in the display area between the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R among the display areas of the liquid crystal display 51. It is designed so that the player can easily recognize it during the game.

In addition, the end condition notification is controlled by blinking display that is alternately switched between the display state and the non-display state at predetermined time intervals. While the player can recognize the difference between the number of games and the number of medals net increase, when it is in the non-display state, the contents of the image behind the end condition notification (AT game history image in this embodiment) can be displayed. It is recognizable.

In addition, in the blinking display control of the notification of the end condition, the closer the establishment of the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous interval is, the more the number of games in the difference in the number of games in the advantageous interval and the difference in the number of medals net increases. The smaller the number of medals, the more likely it is that the termination condition 1 or the termination condition 2 of the advantageous section is more likely to be met, that is, when the difference in the number of games in the advantageous section and the number of medals in the net increase in medals are relatively large. The display state and non-display state of the advantageous section end notice image are switched so that the state time is long and the non-display state time is short. As a result, when it is relatively close to fulfillment of the termination condition of the advantageous section, the notification of the termination condition is emphasized and displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 38(c), in the ED effect, when the number of games that is the difference between the number of games in the current advantageous zone and the upper limit number of games is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment), , to suggest that the advantageous section is about to end, and to give advance notice of the end of the advantageous section to suggest in advance that the advantageous section will end. In the pre-end notification, the number of games that is the difference between the number of games in the current advantageous section and the upper limit number of games, that is, the number of games remaining until the end of the advantageous section is displayed. Ending in the game!”) is displayed in the same area as the area in which the ED confirmation suggestion display image is displayed in the above-described ED shift pre-notification among the display areas of the liquid crystal display 51 . By performing the end pre-notification in the same display area of the liquid crystal display 51 where the ED transition pre-notification is displayed, it is possible to make it easier to recognize in advance that the advantageous section will end.

Also, in the ED effect, even when the difference between the number of medals net increase in the current advantageous section and the prescribed number is less than or equal to a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 6 medals corresponding to the number of net increases in three games), By performing advance notification of the end, it is suggested that the advantageous section is about to end, and that the advantageous section is about to end (not shown). When the difference between the number of medals net increase in the current advantageous section and the prescribed number is equal to or less than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 6 medals corresponding to the number of net increases in 3 games), the pre-end notification indicates the pre-end. A character image (for example, an image such as "?") that does not indicate a specific numerical value in an image (not shown) is displayed in place of a number image that indicates the number of remaining advantageous section games (not shown). In addition, when displaying a character image that does not show a specific numerical value in the advance notification of the end, a character image that does not show a specific numerical value (for example, an image such as "?") is also displayed in the above-mentioned display of the number of games in the remaining advantageous section. , the number of games in the remaining advantageous section is replaced with a numerical image. As a result, when the ED effect is performed when the number of medal net increases exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games until the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied is uncertain. , By not displaying a specific numerical value as the number of games in the remaining advantageous interval in advance notification of the end, there is no mismatch between the number of games in the remaining advantageous interval suggested by the advance notification of the end and the number of remaining advantageous interval games actually controlled. It can be prevented from occurring and confusing the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39(a), in the ED effect, the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, and in the game in which the advantageous interval ends, the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games. Post-notification of the end to suggest When the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous interval is terminated, the post-end notification image (in this embodiment, " The number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit (1500 games)" message image) is displayed in the same area as the area in which the above-mentioned end advance notice and ED transition advance notice are displayed, among the display areas of the liquid crystal display 51. . By displaying the post-end notification, the pre-end notification, and the pre-ED shift notification in the same area of the liquid crystal display 51, the player can easily recognize the content of the notification regarding the end of the advantageous section.

The sub control unit 91 displays the number of AT games specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41 as the number of remaining advantageous interval games. In a game in which post-end notification is given to indicate that the game has been reached, 0 is displayed as the number of games in the remaining advantageous interval in the display of the number of games in the remaining advantageous interval. As a result, the player or the like can be made to recognize that the advantageous section will end when the number of awarded AT games is not left.

In addition, in the ED production, even in a game in which the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number and the advantageous section is terminated, post-completion notification is performed. In the post-finish notification in a game in which the advantageous section ends when the number of medals added in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number, a post-finish indication image (not shown, for example, " The number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the specified value (2388)" is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number.

In addition, post-end notification will be given when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous section ends, and when the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of medals and the advantageous section ends. , a common display mode (for example, a display mode in which a message image of "The advantageous section has reached the upper limit") may be used. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the termination condition (at least one of the termination condition 1 and the termination condition 2) of the advantageous section has been satisfied by the post-termination notification.

In addition, in the ED effect, even in a game where the advantageous section ends, the end condition is notified, for example, a text image saying "177 more cards will be obtained or the game will end after 000 more games." , etc., it is notified that the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is established in the game even with the end condition notification.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39(b), in the ED effect, at the end of the game when the advantageous section ends (for example, all reels stop rotating and the pressing operation of the third stop switch ends) ), the result of the advantageous section is notified. In the result notification of the advantageous section, in the result notification, a character image and a numerical image indicating the number of medal net increase in the advantageous section (for example, "2308" image) and a numerical image indicating the number of games controlled to AT state (for example, , "1154 game") are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the game result in the advantageous section. After announcing the result of the advantageous section, a start operation for starting the next game (operation of the start switch 7 with the specified number of bets set) is performed, and the result of the advantageous section is displayed. Terminate the notification and shift to the normal effect (see FIG. 39(c)).

In addition, the post-end notification is performed until a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the result of the advantageous section has been reported. The liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display an initialization suggesting image indicating that the advantageous section data has been initialized (in this embodiment, a message image of "Information relating to navigation notification has been initialized"). As shown in FIG. 39(c), the post-end notification is continued even when the result notification of the advantageous section is terminated and the normal effect is started. An initialization suggestion image is displayed, suggesting that the advantageous section data has been initialized, so that the number of AT games awarded in the previous advantageous section, the winning result of the additional state lottery, etc., will be inherited after that. The player can be made to recognize that there is no so-called AT state latency or the like.

In addition, in the ED effect, at the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends, for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, at least 3 seconds or more), to call attention to immersion in the game at the slot machine 1. to prevent immersion. In the addiction prevention notification, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an addiction prevention image (in this embodiment, a message image saying "Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately. Be careful not to get addicted."). In the immersion prevention notification, if the notification of the result of the advantageous section ends before a predetermined period of time (at least 3 seconds or more in this embodiment) elapses, after that, the system shifts to the normal effect or the settlement process described later. Even if it is done, it will continue to be displayed until the predetermined time continues.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the sub-control unit 91 sets the condition that the game is not played during the period until the above-described predetermined number of games has elapsed as the termination condition for the post-end notification. When the adjustment switch 10 is operated, that is, when the adjustment process is performed on the main control unit 41 side, the post-end notification is terminated.

When the settlement process is performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 displays a settlement suggesting image (in this embodiment, an image of a predetermined character and a message image of “Payment completed!” (FIG. 40B). )) can be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate that the settlement process will be performed. Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the main control unit 41 ends the settlement processing, the display of the settlement suggesting image is ended, and the normal presentation is performed. In addition, after the main control unit 41 ends the settlement process, by setting the number of bets before a predetermined time elapses, the display of the settlement suggestion image is ended, and the normal effect is started. do. In addition, when shifting to the normal effect after the settlement suggestion image is displayed, the post-end notification is not performed (see FIG. 40(d)). Further, the above-mentioned immersion prevention notification is given when the settlement process is started and the settlement suggestion image is displayed before a predetermined time (at least 3 seconds in this embodiment) elapses. The display is continued together with the payment suggesting image until the time elapses.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(c), the sub-control unit 91 sets a state in which no game is played (at least the next game is played) during a period until the above-described predetermined number of games elapses as an end condition for the post-end notification. A state in which the number of bets for starting the game is not set) is continued and a predetermined period of time (three minutes in this embodiment) elapses, so that the post-end notification is terminated. The main control unit 41 determines that the state in which no game is played (at least the state in which the number of bets for starting the next game is not set) continues for a predetermined period of time (three minutes in this embodiment). By doing so, it is possible to control to a demonstration state, and the sub-control section 91 performs a demonstration effect when the main control section 41 side is controlling the demonstration state.

In the demonstration effect, as shown in FIG. 40(c), for example, characters appearing in the effect of the slot machine 1, the contents of the story, videos and images explaining the effect to be executed, a combination table of the slot machine 1, By displaying an image showing a payout table, reel pattern arrangement, game flow, etc. in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that the slot machine 1 is in a non-playing state. Then, when the number of bets is set during execution of the demonstration effect, the sub-control unit 91 ends the demonstration effect and shifts to the normal effect. In addition, when shifting to the normal effect after the demonstration effect ends, the post-end notification is not performed (see FIG. 40(d)).

[Effect 1]
Among conventional slot machines, which are controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player, there is a configuration provided with an advantageous state lamp which remains lit during the period during which the advantageous state is controlled. In such a slot machine, no consideration is given to the timing at which the advantageous status lamp is turned on or off.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous zone transition lottery target combination, and that the transition to the advantageous zone is made in the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, the game section can be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player, and the section display LED 12a (the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has been made. 8th segment), and after shifting to the advantageous section, the section display LED 12a starts lighting at the start of the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied by the first navigation notification, and the transition to the advantageous section. It is possible to notify that it has been done, and it is configured to start lighting of the section display LED 12a before the navigation notification is performed for the first time in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting the section display LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section, thereby informing that the advantageous section is being controlled.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting the lighting of the section display LED 12a. The display of the navigation information may be started at the same time. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to start lighting of the section display LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section, and to notify that the advantageous section is being controlled.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can end the advantageous interval when the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied when controlling the advantageous interval. The section display LED 12a (the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) is provided to notify that the end of the section display LED 12a is provided, and when it is an advantageous section, the section display LED 12a is controlled to be lit. When the lottery result of the internal lottery is a specific result (small winning combination), the unit 41 can stop different symbol combinations on the reels according to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. In this case, since the timing at which the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is different depending on the stopped symbol combination, attention can be paid to the notification by the section display LED 12a.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a predetermined result (replay combination), the main control unit 41 controls different symbol combinations according to the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. can be stopped on the reels, and at this time, the timing of notifying that the advantageous section has ended by the section display LED 12a by the stopped symbol combination is common. It is possible to prevent people from being confused.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores the number of medals owned by the player as credits, and can settle the number of medals stored as credits when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10. When the advantageous section ends, the main control unit 41 notifies that the advantageous section has ended by the section display LED 12a during the period from when the reel is stopped until the reception of the settlement operation becomes valid. Therefore, the player can end the game after recognizing that the advantageous section has ended.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a small win is won and the advantageous section ends, the main control unit 41 displays the section at a timing after the display of the number of payout medals by the auxiliary game display 12 is completed. Since the LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended after recognizing that medals have been paid out.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a replay winning combination ends the advantageous section, lighting of the replaying LED 20 is started to indicate that the replay has been granted. Since the display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous interval has ended, it is possible to suggest that the advantageous interval has ended after making the player aware that the replay has been granted.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section ends, the insertion request LED 17 starts lighting after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, so that medals are inserted. Before it is notified that it is possible to play the game, the section display LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, so that the player can start the next game without knowing that the advantageous section has ended. It is possible to prevent throwing in medals for the purpose.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment provides navigation information for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player, and a game for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player in accordance with the winning of a minor winning combination. During the period in which the auxiliary display 12 is provided and controlled to the advantageous section, the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 can be controlled to be lit as the section display LED 12a, and the advantageous section can be controlled. It is a configuration that can notify the fact that it has shifted, and it is a configuration that uses a part of the game auxiliary display 12 as the section display LED 12a to notify that it has shifted to the advantageous section and that the advantageous section has ended. There is no need to provide the main control unit 41 with display means separate from the game auxiliary display 12 for displaying navigation information and the number of medals to be paid out as display means for notifying that the game has shifted to the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses a part of the game auxiliary display 12 as the section display LED 12a to notify that the advantageous section has been entered and that the advantageous section has ended. A display means provided separately from the device 12 may be used as the section display LED 12a to notify the transition to the advantageous section. A display means such as an LED or a lamp may be arranged, and the display means may be used to notify that the transition to the advantageous section has been made and that the advantageous section has ended. According to this configuration, display means for notifying that the transition to the advantageous section has been completed and that the advantageous section has ended are provided separately from the game auxiliary display 12, so that the display that notifies that the transition to the advantageous section has been performed is provided. Since it can be clearly distinguished from other displays and recognized, and even in this case, it is provided near the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it.

Display means for notifying that the transition to the advantageous section and the fact that the advantageous section has ended may be provided, for example, by credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, input request LED 17, etc. provided in game display unit 13. By arranging the display means on the substrate on which the display device and the like are arranged, the display means can be provided near the game auxiliary display device 12, thereby preventing the player from overlooking it. In addition, by arranging the display means for notifying that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred, for example, around the switches operated at the start or end of the game, such as the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the settlement switch 10, etc. , it is possible to prevent an oversight by the player.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 turns on the section display LED 12a at the start of the game in which the section display start condition is satisfied after the game section is shifted to the advantageous section, and the section display start condition is satisfied. is started to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted to, while at the end of the game in which the advantageous section ends, the section display LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended. The main control unit 41 turns on the section display LED 12a at the end of the game that transitions to the advantageous section to notify that the transition to the advantageous section has started, and turns off the section display LED 12a at the end of the game that ends the advantageous section. It is also possible to notify that the advantageous section is terminated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes a section display LED 12a (the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the auxiliary game display 12) that notifies that the advantageous section has been entered and that the advantageous section has ended. By controlling the display LED 12a to turn off, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended. In the main process, the state control data (light off) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. , in the AT state management process, the RAM 41c initializes a predetermined area in which data relating to the advantageous section is stored, thereby initializing the data relating to the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent data relating to the advantageous interval from remaining in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c even though the advantageous interval has been notified by being controlled to the extinguished state.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the data on the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c before performing the process of setting the state control data (turning off) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. By performing the processing, the data related to the advantageous section is initialized before the section display LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. It may be configured to be initialized. For example, the process of setting the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a and the process of initializing the data related to the advantageous section are configured to be performed in the timer interrupt processing performed at the same timing. The control for turning off the section display LED 12a and the process for initializing the data regarding the advantageous section can be performed at the same time.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to initialize the data regarding the advantageous section before controlling the section display LED 12a to turn off. The structure which controls LED12a to a light extinction state may be sufficient. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data relating to the advantageous section from being initialized while the section display LED 12a is being controlled to be lit.

In the main processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores data relating to the advantageous section in the AT state management process before performing the process of setting the state control data (turning off) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized by the initialization process does not include the output buffer of the section display LED 12a and is initialized by the initialization process. Since the data relating to the advantageous section to be converted does not include the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a, the state control data (lights out) is stored in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a. , the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a is not initialized by the initialization processing in the AT state management process, so the advantageous section The section display LED 12a can be reliably controlled to be in the lighting state until the end of .

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section (total number of medals used for setting the number of bets in the advantageous section from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section). It is possible to update a net increase number counter for counting the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals), and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section specified based on the net increase number counter value is a prescribed number that is predetermined. (In this embodiment, the value (2388) obtained by subtracting the maximum payout number (15) of the slot machine 1 from 2400 and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet amount). When it exceeds, that is, when the specified number of net increases in the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number + 1 or more, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed, the advantageous section is terminated, and the transition to the normal section is performed. When updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds the value for the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and adds the value for the medals used for setting the bet amount to the net increase number counter If the calculated value obtained by subtracting is smaller than 0, the net increase number counter value is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is set as the net increase number counter value. By controlling to update the net increase number counter value, the net increase number of medals is counted starting from the time when the net increase number of medals decreases the most after the start of the advantageous section, and the net increase number counter value is calculated. , the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is started when the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number.
According to this configuration, after the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is terminated when the net increase in medals up to the present from the time when the net increase in the game value has decreased the most exceeds the prescribed number. Therefore, even if the net increase in medals starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the specified number, it is advantageous if the net increase in medals after the medals turn to increase exceeds the specified number. Since the section ends, not only the net increase in medals during the advantageous section, but also the net increase in medals after the start of the advantageous section can be limited to a range based on the specified number of medals.

In this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game during the advantageous interval. , based on the net increase number value obtained by adding the number of payouts to the net increase number value specified based on the net increase number counter, and subtracting the number of medals used for the bet number from the added net increase number value The net increase number counter to be updated, that is, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section counted by the net increase number counter is counted based on the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section. However, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section should be at least the number of medals given to the player minus the medals used in the game by setting the number of bets by the player. In the event that it is actually permitted to win a predetermined minor combination that accompanies the awarding of medals, and the player is in a situation where it is possible for the player to win that minor combination, it is not possible to allow the player to win a prize. In the case of failure, the medals given to the player may be counted as the medals given to the player assuming that the small winning combination has been won.

Further, in this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 reads the net increase number value specified based on the net increase number counter into a predetermined register, and then executes the game. The payout number value of medals to be paid out is specified based on the prize winning flag, the payout number is added to the net increase number value of a predetermined register, and the number of medals used for setting the bet amount is subtracted from the net increase number value after the addition. When updating the net increase counter, the main control unit 41 updates the net increase counter based on the net increase counter. The net increase number counter may be updated by adding the net increase number obtained by subtracting the medal number value used for setting the bet amount in the game to the net increase number counter.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number in the AT state management process. After reading the numerical value into a predetermined register, the payout number value of the medals to be paid out is specified based on the prize winning flag of the game, the payout number is added to the net increase number value of the predetermined register, and the net increase number value after the addition is used for betting. By subtracting the number of medals used for setting the number, the net increase number value in the game is calculated in a predetermined register, and it is determined whether or not the net increase number value of the predetermined register exceeds the specified number. However, the main control unit 41 calculates the net increase number of the game based on the number of medals to be paid out and the number of medals used for setting the number of bets in the game, and displays the calculated net increase number on the net increase counter. to update the net increase number counter, and then, based on the net increase number counter value, it may be determined whether or not the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number.

Further, in this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the medal value used for setting the number is smaller than 0, the net increase number counter value is corrected to 0, and the net increase number counter increases or decreases the number of medals. is less than 0, the number less than 0 is not counted, and only the value greater than 0 is counted. A configuration in which the net increase in value is counted may also be used. For example, after initializing the net increase number counter to 0 at the start of an advantageous interval, the main control unit 41 net increases the number of paid medals when medals are paid out during the advantageous interval. The number of medals is added to the number counter, and when medals are used to set the number of bets, the value of the number of medals is subtracted from the net increase number counter, thereby counting the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to count whether the number of medals increases or decreases is less than 0 or exceeds 0.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the number of net additions of medals based on the value of the counter of the number of net additions of medals after the start of the advantageous section, starting from when the number of net additions of medals has decreased the most. , the main control unit 41, as a uniformly set trigger after the start of the advantageous section, when the net addition of medals up to the present from the normal section to the advantageous section as a starting point exceeds the specified number of medals A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section is terminated and then shifted to the normal section. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the termination condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the starting point is set uniformly from the normal section. Since it is not necessary to determine the termination condition of the advantageous section based on the net addition of medals starting from a point other than when the transition to the advantageous section is made, the control for determining the termination condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number counter value is simplified. can be

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the number of net additions of medals based on the value of the counter of the number of net additions of medals after the start of the advantageous section, starting from when the number of net additions of medals has decreased the most. After the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 indicates that the transition to the AT state is indicated by the section display LED 12a as a trigger that is uniformly set after the start of the advantageous section, and the medal is awarded by the navigation notification. When the operation mode to increase is notified, if the net increase in medals up to the present starting from exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the normal section may be started. According to this configuration, , the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for judging the termination condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display LED 12a suggests that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from a time other than when the operation mode for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, it is advantageous based on the net increase number counter value. It is possible to simplify the control for judging the end condition of the section.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the number of net additions of medals based on the value of the counter of the number of net additions of medals after the start of the advantageous section, starting from when the number of net additions of medals has decreased the most. , The main control unit 41, as a trigger that is uniformly set after the start of the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not an operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, When the transition to the AT state is indicated by the section display LED 12a, the advantage section may be ended and the normal section may be started when the net increase in number of medals up to the present from the starting point exceeds the specified number. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the number of medals by the navigation notification. Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, there is no need to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from other than when the transition to the advantageous section is indicated by the section display LED 12a. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase number counter value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the AT state in which the navigation notification is performed to notify the player of an operation mode advantageous to the player when the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery during the advantageous section. Even if the navigation target role is won in the lottery, it is possible to control to a control state related to AT including a premonitory state in which navigation notification is not performed. Regardless of whether the AT-related control state is AT state or not, the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase number counter, and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is calculated by the occurrence of winning accompanied by the payout of medals. When updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 selects a navigation target role by an internal lottery if the AT control state is a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section. is won, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player, and when the number of medals increases, the increase is added to the net increase number counter, and the navigation target role is won by internal lottery, and the game is played. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to players and the number of medals does not increase, the net increase number counter is not incremented. When the navigation target role is won by lottery, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player, and regardless of whether or not the number of medals has increased, the game is stopped in an operation mode advantageous to the player. It may be configured to count the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section by adding the increase in medals when the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated to the net increase number counter. In a premonitory state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, if the medals actually increase, they are added to the net increase number counter, and the medals cannot be increased. In this case, the number of medals is not added to the net increase number counter, and in the AT state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section is notified, the number of medals actually increases when the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery. Regardless of whether or not the number of medals actually increased, the net increase number counter is incremented. Intentionally prolonging the advantageous section by adding In a situation where the player cannot reliably increase the number of medals while preventing the player from overspending, adding the net increase number counter only when the number of medals actually increases is disadvantageous to the player. can be prevented.

Also, when updating the net increase number counter, if the AT control state is in a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous section, the navi target role is won in the internal lottery, and the number of medals increases. If the number of medals is not increased, the net increase counter is not added and the AT control state is in the AT state during the advantageous section. Furthermore, when the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether or not the number of medals has increased, the amount of medal increase when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player. is added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section. When the lottery result of the internal lottery results in a predetermined small winning combination in which the predetermined operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing the medals does not change, regardless of whether or not the medals are increased by being operated in the predetermined operation mode. Instead, it may be configured to count the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section by adding the increase in medals when operated in a predetermined operation mode to the net increase in number counter. If the player can increase the number of medals, it is possible to prevent intentional extension of the advantageous section by adding the net increase number counter regardless of whether or not the number of medals actually increased.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets at least one of the conditions that the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and that the number of net increase in the advantageous interval exceeds a predetermined specified number of games. is established, the AT state management process first determines whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval specified based on the counter for the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games. , when it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the maximum number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed without determining whether or not the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and the advantageous section is Since it is a configuration to end, if the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games as a condition for ending the advantageous section, it is determined whether the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number of games. Since there is no need to perform this, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination as to whether or not the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section has exceeded the prescribed number.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets at least one of the conditions that the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and that the number of net increase in the advantageous interval exceeds a predetermined specified number of games. is established, the AT state management process first determines whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games. If not, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous interval exceeds the prescribed number. Therefore, when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and the advantageous interval ends, the control of determining whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games is more complicated than the control for determining whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games. It is possible to omit the control for determining whether or not the net increase in the number of sheets exceeds the specified number of sheets.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 first determines whether or not the number of advantageous interval games has reached the upper limit number of games. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the net increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. It may be configured to determine whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games when the net increase in the number of games in the section does not exceed the specified number. Since the frequency of the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeding the specified number of sheets can be higher than the frequency of occurrence, it is possible to omit the control related to the determination of events with low frequency.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets at least one of the conditions that the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games and that the number of net increase in the advantageous interval exceeds a predetermined specified number of games. is established, and when both the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section game When either the number of games reaches the maximum number of games or the number of net increases in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed and the common data (data related to the advantageous section) is restored. Since it is configured to be initialized, when both the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section is reached the maximum number of games or the number of net increases in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, and the common data is initialized. It is possible to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage from occurring in the case where is established.

For example, when the first condition is that the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the maximum number of games in the advantageous interval and the advantageous interval ends, the data corresponding to the first condition is initialized, and the second condition is In a configuration in which data corresponding to the second condition is initialized only when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of sheets and the advantageous section ends, both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Then, when the advantageous section ends, both the data corresponding to the first condition and the data corresponding to the second condition are initialized. However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section, the same data as when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section By adopting a configuration for initialization, it is possible to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage between when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied and when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. can.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment detects that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, and that the net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined specified number of games. Since the advantageous interval ends when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, the advantageous interval ends when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, so the advantageous interval can continue for a long time. Even if the advantageous section does not continue for a long period of time, if the number of medals increases rapidly in the advantageous section, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section will exceed the specified number of medals, and the advantageous section will end. It is possible to prevent the degree of advantage in the advantageous section from becoming excessively high.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the control state data (lighting) in the output buffer of the section display LED 12a when the section display start condition is satisfied, and performs one-interrupt wait processing. After that, by controlling to display the navigation display of the navigation information on the game auxiliary display 12 in the instruction setting process, after starting lighting of the section display LED 12a, the navigation information on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. It is a configuration to start, and in a game in which the transition to the advantageous section is suggested by the section display LED 12a, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, by the navigation notification Since the section display LED 12a suggests that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred at a timing prior to the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified, the section display LED 12a indicates the advantageous section. In a game suggesting that the transition has been made, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing the medals are activated by the navigation notification. Since the transition to the advantageous section is suggested by the section display LED 12a before the operation mode is notified, the stop switch 8L increases medals in the game after recognizing that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. It is possible to recognize the operation mode of 8C and 8R.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 indicates that the transition to the advantageous section has been made by the section display LED 12a at a timing prior to the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. However, in the game in which the condition for starting the section display is satisfied, the section display LED 12a lights up at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing the medals is notified by the navigation notification. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is suggested that a shift to an advantageous section has started, and according to this configuration, in a game in which the section display LED 12a suggests that a shift has been made to an advantageous section, the stop switch 8L increases medals by navigation notification. , 8C, and 8R are reported, the section display LED 12a indicates that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals by navigation notification. is suggested, it is possible to simultaneously recognize the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals and the fact that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 indicates that the transition to the advantageous section has been made by the section display LED 12a at a timing prior to the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification. However, in a game in which the transition to the advantageous section is suggested by the section display LED 12a, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification, the navigation After the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified, the section display LED 12a may start lighting to suggest that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. In a game in which the LED 12a suggests that the transition to an advantageous section has occurred, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification, the stop switch 8L for increasing the medals by the navigation notification. , 8C, and 8R are notified, the section display LED 12a suggests that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. It is possible to focus attention on whether it is suggested that the transition to the advantageous section is made in .

[Effect 2]
Conventional slot machines are designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate in a state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is controlled in an advantageous section, or in a state in which winning of a special prize is carried over. There is a configuration that is

In the case of the latter slot machine, which is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate in a state in which special prize winnings are carried over, the slot machine is first installed in a game arcade, or the data is changed. is initialized, it is necessary to play games at the game parlor until a special winning prize is won so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate. On the other hand, in the case of the former slot machine, which is controlled to the advantageous interval, if it is configured so that it can be controlled to the advantageous interval while the game is played at the amusement arcade until the special prize is won, before the player starts playing the game. Since there is a possibility of being controlled in an advantageous section, there is a risk that fairness will be impaired when a player plays a game.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived, the special combination (BB) is selected. Winning can be carried over to the next game or later, and the operation mode (correct order of pushing) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous to the player when the small combination of pushing order is won in the internal lottery. It is possible to perform navigation notification to notify, and it is possible to control to an advantageous section in which the order of pressing the correct answer can be notified by the navigation notification, and the winning of the special combination (BB) is carried over. It is possible to notify the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous by navigation notification inside the inside, and it is designed so that the medal payout rate is appropriate inside the inside. It is possible to control the advantageous section in both non-internal and internal periods in which the winning of the special bonus (BB) is not carried over, and the termination conditions of the advantageous section in the internal period are at least the termination condition 1, the termination condition On the other hand, the condition for ending the advantageous section during the non-internal period is that the condition for ending the advantageous section during the non-internal period is satisfied. The configuration is different from the end condition.
According to this configuration, the payout rate of medals is appropriate during the internal period, while the payout rate of medals is inappropriate during the non-internal period. Since the end condition of the advantageous section is different, appropriate control can be performed depending on whether the vehicle is inside or not inside.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the order of pressing the correct answer can be notified by navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the inside, while in the non-internal , the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, and it is possible to control to an advantageous interval both during non-internal and internal, and whether the game state is non-internal in each game during the advantageous interval If it is determined that it is not inside the game, the advantageous interval is controlled to end at the end of the game. This is a configuration in which the advantageous section is ended in the game played.
According to this configuration, in a configuration in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate during the internal period and the payout rate of medals is inappropriate during the non-internal period, when the control is performed in the advantageous section during the non-internal period, the Since the advantageous interval is ended in the game in which the advantageous interval has started, even if the game is controlled to the advantageous interval by the amusement arcade until the payout rate of medals reaches a proper level, the player can continue playing. It is possible to prevent fairness from being impaired when a player plays a game because the advantageous section ends before the game is played.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal in each game during the advantageous interval. If the advantageous interval is controlled in the non-internal mode, the advantageous interval ends in the game in which the advantageous interval started, but the advantageous interval ends in the game in which the advantageous interval started. For example, only in the first game of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal, and if it is determined that it is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. A configuration or the like that performs control so as to end the section may be used.

In this embodiment, the slot machine 1 is controlled in the game during the advantageous interval by applying that the gaming state is non-internal as an optional condition (end condition 3) among the conditions for ending the advantageous interval. By controlling to end the advantageous interval when it is established that the current gaming state is non-internal, if the advantageous interval is controlled in non-internal, in the game in which the advantageous interval has started It is a configuration to end the advantageous section, but as an optional condition, it may be applied that the game state being controlled is inside, and when it is controlled to the advantageous section during non-internal, when it becomes inside It is also possible to terminate the advantageous section when an arbitrary condition is satisfied. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, referring to the game state of the game and the winning situation of the special role, the game specified that the game state changes from non-internal to internal (non-internal and In a game in which the winning of a special role is specified), by configuring control to end the advantageous section, when controlling to the advantageous section during non-internal, an arbitrary condition is established when it becomes internal. , the advantageous section can be terminated. Further, it may be configured such that the advantageous section is terminated when an arbitrary condition is met when the inside is reached. For example, when controlling to an advantageous interval, the game state of the game in question and the game state of the previous game are referred to, and it is specified that the game state has changed from non-internal to internal (previous game is non-internal). In the game where the game is inside the inside this time), by configuring the control to end the advantageous interval, when controlling to the advantageous interval in the non-inside, when it becomes inside, the arbitrary condition is established, the advantageous section may be terminated.
According to this configuration, while the payout rate of medals is appropriate during the internal period, the payout rate of medals is inappropriate during the non-internal period. Since the advantageous interval is terminated when it becomes medium, even if the game is controlled to the advantageous interval in the state where the game is played at the amusement arcade until the medal payout rate reaches the correct internal medium, the player cannot play the game. Since the advantageous section ends at this point, it is possible to prevent the fairness from being impaired when the player plays the game.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled to non-internal, internal, and special states as game states. RB, which is transferred by deriving the RB is a state higher than internal and internal), and the probability of winning a small combination in the internal lottery that allows the derivation of a small combination of symbols with the award of medals is higher than that of non-internal and internal. is also high, and in general BB is not controlled in the advantageous section.
According to this configuration, the advantageous section is not controlled in the general BB where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, so unnecessary control of the advantageous section in the general BB can be avoided.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled to non-internal, internal, and special states as game states. RB, which is transferred by deriving the RB is a state higher than internal and internal), and the probability of winning a small combination in the internal lottery that allows the derivation of a small combination of symbols with the award of medals is higher than that of non-internal and internal. is in a high state, and the RB is not controlled in the advantageous section.
According to this configuration, the advantageous section is not controlled in the RB where the medal payout rate is not appropriate, so unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB can be avoided.

In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to a state other than BB general (non-internal, internal, RB), the special combination (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery, while the game state is BB. When it is general, by being subject to the internal lottery, the BB general has a normal state (non- However, even when the game state is controlled to be non-internal or internal, the special combination (RB) is subject to the internal lottery. , The probability of winning a special role (RB) in the internal lottery during the BB general is compared to the probability of winning the special role (RB) in the internal lottery in at least one state of non-internal or internal. High configuration is fine.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a sub-control section 91 capable of executing an internal middle indication indicating that the internal state is reached, and a main control unit capable of executing a section display indicating that the machine is being controlled in an advantageous section. A sub-control unit 91 indicates that the game state has shifted to internal by ending the preparation-in-preparation presentation at the end of the game in which the game state has shifted from non-internal to internal. While the internal suggestion can be executed using the liquid crystal display 51, the main control unit 41 uses the section display LED 12a to display the section at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section has shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. can be performed, the position at which the inner suggestion is executed and the position at which the interval indication is performed are different, and the timing at which the inner suggestion is performed and the timing at which the interval indication is performed are different. It's a different configuration.
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding between the suggestion that the inside is inside by the inside indication and the suggestion that the transition to the advantageous interval is made by the interval display.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the order of pressing the correct answer can be notified by navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the inside, while in the non-internal , the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, and the main control unit 41 is equipped with a section display that suggests that control is being performed in an advantageous section, and is advantageous both during non-internal and internal periods. It is possible to control the section, and the main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) in which navigation notification is performed when it is controlled in the internal and advantageous section, and the advantageous section After shifting to , by controlling to display the section in the game that first performs the navigation notification, it is possible to display the section when it is controlled to the advantageous section in the internal, but in the non-internal It is configured such that the section display is not executed when the control is made to the advantageous section.
According to this configuration, while the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is inappropriate in the non-inside, the inside in which the medal payout rate is appropriate is in an advantageous section. When controlled, the section display can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is not appropriate, and if it is controlled to the advantageous section during the non-internal period, the section display is not executed, so the medal payout rate is appropriate. Unnecessary section display is not executed in a situation where a game is played on the amusement arcade side until the inside of the inside becomes .

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the order of pressing the correct answer can be notified by navigation notification, and the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the inside, while in the non-internal , the medal payout rate is not appropriate, and the main control unit 41 can execute the section display that suggests that the control is in the advantageous section, and the internal middle indication that suggests that the internal state is reached. is provided with a sub control unit 91 capable of executing the above, and is configured to be controllable to an advantageous interval during both non-internal and internal operations. , It is possible to shift to AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) to perform navigation notification, and after moving to an advantageous section, by controlling to perform section display in the game in which navigation notification is performed first, When controlled to an advantageous section during non-internal mode, the section display is not executed, but the sub-control unit 91 shifts the production during preparation performed when controlled during non-internal mode from non-internal mode to internal mode. It is terminated when it is controlled inside, and when it is controlled inside, the production during preparation is not performed, and by controlling it to perform the normal production that is performed inside inside, the transition from non-inside to inside is performed. This is the configuration for executing the internal suggestion when the
According to this configuration, while the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is inappropriate in the non-internal, the inside in which the medal payout rate is appropriate is in an advantageous section. When controlled, the section display can be executed. However, when controlled to the advantageous section in the non-internal state where the medal payout rate is inappropriate, the section display by the main control unit 41 is not executed. Unnecessary suggestions are not executed in the situation where the game is played on the amusement center side until the payout rate of is appropriate and the sub-control unit 91 changes Since the internal middle suggestion is executed, it is possible to specify that the internal middle state where the medal payout rate is appropriate in the situation where the game is played on the amusement arcade side.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the preparation-in-progress screen and the non-internal indication screen in the preparation-in-progress effect, so that the main control unit 41 side changes the game state to non-internal. It is controlled to the medium or special state, and it is a configuration that suggests that it has not been shifted to the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate. The sub-control unit 91 may be configured to display only the in-preparation screen on the liquid crystal display 51 in the preparation-in-preparation presentation.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs an effect during preparation when the game state is controlled to be non-internal, and when the game state is controlled to be internal, the effect during preparation is not performed, it is configured to perform an internal medium suggestion that suggests that the game state has changed from non-internal to internal medium. Anything that can suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in the situation where the game is played on the amusement arcade side until it becomes, the period during which the main control unit 41 side is controlling in internal While performing a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51, an effect of controlling a specific LED to a lighting state, an effect of outputting a specific sound from the speakers 53 and 54, etc.), A configuration in which the specific effect is not performed during the period of internal control may be used, or the specific effect is performed during the period of non-internal control, while the specific effect is not performed during the period of internal control. A configuration in which this is not performed is also acceptable. Moreover, in these configurations, the specific effect may be performed during one game, or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in the situation where the game is played at the amusement arcade until it reaches internal in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate. be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the non-internal display effect, which is not performed when the game state is controlled in the internal state, every time the game state is controlled in the non-internal state. Each time the game state changes from non-internal to internal, an internal indication indicating that the game has changed from non-internal to internal is performed. Anything that can suggest that the game state has shifted from non-internal to internal in the situation where the game is played on the amusement arcade side until it reaches the internal state is acceptable. After it is specified that the game state is not yet transferred to the internal state, the storage means of the sub-control unit 91 (for example, RAM, etc.) is initialized, the game state has not yet been controlled to the internal state on the main control unit 41 side, and in the non-internal state being controlled, the non-internal state display effect is displayed. After the transition from the non-internal state to the internal state, the display effect during the non-internal state may not be performed even if the transition is made to the non-internal state again. With such a configuration, after the state of playing a game at the amusement arcade ends until the payout rate of medals reaches an appropriate level, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary internal indications.

Further, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the internal suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub-controller 91, but the main control section 41 may be configured to perform the internal suggestion. As a configuration for the main control unit 41 to suggest the inside, for example, the main control unit 41 has an LED indicator that suggests that the inside is not inside or inside, and when the LED indicator is not inside On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the transition to the inside is made by controlling the LED indicator to turn off when it is inside, and the LED indicator may be turned on when it is inside. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the transition to the inside is performed by controlling to the off state when the inside is not inside. In addition, in a configuration in which the main control unit 41 is provided with an LED indicator that indicates that the user is not inside or inside, the LED indicator may be used as a indicator for suggesting something other than indicating inside (e.g., game assistance). 12, etc.), or may be provided as a dedicated display for performing only internal suggestions.

[Effect 3]
As a conventional slot machine, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value of 1500 games, the advantageous state is terminated and the advantageous state is reached. There is also a configuration in which information related to control of an advantageous state, such as the number of remaining games, is also initialized.

In such a slot machine, when the number of games controlled to be in an advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state is ended, and information related to control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is also provided. Although it will be initialized, there is a risk that the information related to the control of the advantageous state will be initialized and the player who does not know that the information will not be handed over to the subsequent game will be dissatisfied. It may confuse you.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous interval that is advantageous to the player. When either one of these conditions is established, the advantageous section can be ended, and when the advantageous section ends, an advantageous section data initialization process can be executed for initializing information regarding the advantageous section. Further, the slot machine 1 is provided with a sub-control unit 91 capable of performing post-end notification for notifying that the information regarding the advantageous interval has been initialized. Post-notification is started, and the post-end notification is continued even in the game after the game in which the advantageous section ends.
According to this configuration, when either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section and the advantageous section ends, and the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized, the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized. Since the end post-notification is performed to notify the effect, even when the advantageous section ends and the information on the advantageous section is not taken over after that, the player can be prevented from being dissatisfied or confused. In addition, the post-end notification is started in the game in which the advantageous interval ends, and is continued in the games after the game in which the advantageous interval ends, so that the player can receive the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous interval ends. Even if the user misses it, it is possible to ensure that the information regarding the advantageous section will not be inherited thereafter.

The sub-control unit 91 can perform post-end notification to notify that the information on the advantageous interval has been initialized, and in the game after the game in which the advantageous interval ends, the result of notifying the game result in the advantageous interval It is possible to execute the notification, and after executing the result notification, the normal effect is executed, the post-end notification is started in the game in which the advantageous interval ends, and the game after the game in which the advantageous interval ends In the game in which the result notification is executed and the game in which the normal effect is executed, the post-end notification is continued.
According to this configuration, the post-end notification is started in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and in the game after the game in which the advantageous section ends, in which the result notification in the advantageous section is executed and the normal effect after that is continued even in the game in which is executed, even if the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous interval ends, it is possible to reliably recognize that the information on the advantageous interval will not be taken over after that. can.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can terminate the advantageous section when either one of the termination condition 1 and the termination condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information about the advantageous section can be executed. Advantageous section end condition 1 is that the number of games controlled to the advantageous section (advantageous section game number) reaches the specified number of games In the embodiment, it is 1500 games), and the end condition 2 is that the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (2388 in this embodiment).
According to this configuration, the advantageous interval ends when the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches the specified number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous interval exceeds the specified number, and information on the advantageous interval is also provided. Since it is initialized, it is possible to suppress excessive increase in gambling property due to being controlled in the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can end the advantageous section when either one of the termination condition 1 or the termination condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. The configuration is such that an advantageous interval data initialization process for initializing information about the advantageous interval can be executed, and the number of given AT games is consumed to change the control state of the AT to an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to control the state, and the information about the advantageous section is a configuration including the number of AT games that have been given. , the number of AT games given becomes the initial value of the ED state (the number of games from the start of ED control until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied), and in the advantageous section, end condition 1 or end condition 2 By controlling the number of given AT games to be 0 when either one is established, the advantageous section is ended in a state where the number of given AT games does not remain. , the main control unit 41 does not perform the ED-related control 1 or the ED-related control 2, and when either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, the number of AT games given is When either end condition 1 or end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section without controlling it to be 0, the advantageous section is ended even if the number of given AT games remains 1 or more. Configuration is fine. With such a configuration, even if the advantageous section ends with one or more AT games remaining, and the AT game number is not taken over as information on the advantageous section after that, the player is notified after the end of the game. Since the player can be made aware of this fact, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to consume the number of AT games given in the advantageous section and control the AT control state to an AT state which is an advantageous state for the player. There is, the sub-control unit 91 can perform post-end notification to notify that the information related to the advantageous section including the number of AT games given has been initialized, and the main control unit 41 side gives The remaining number of AT games remaining without being consumed (the number of remaining advantageous section games) is specified based on a command received from the main control unit 41, and an ED effect can be executed. The unit 41 performs ED-related control 1 and ED-related control 2, so that when the condition for starting ED control is satisfied, the number of AT games provided is the initial value of the ED state (advantageous from the start of ED control). the number of games until the end condition of the section is satisfied), and when either end condition 1 or end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, the number of AT games given is controlled to be 0, By transmitting a command that can specify the number of AT games to the sub-control unit 91, in a game that suggests that the remaining number of AT games that are not consumed by the ED effect is 0, Although the advantageous section is terminated, the main control unit 41 does not perform ED-related control 1 or ED-related control 2, and when either termination condition 1 or termination condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. In addition, when either end condition 1 or end condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section without controlling the number of AT games given to be 0, the number of AT games given is 1 or more. In other words, even if it is suggested that the number of AT games given by the ED effect remains one or more, the advantageous section may be terminated. In such a configuration, the AT remaining unconsumed given by the main control unit 41 side until the information about the advantageous section is initialized, that is, until the termination condition 1 or the termination condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied. The remaining number of games can be suggested by the ED effect. In addition, even if the advantageous section ends even though it is suggested that the number of AT games remains, and the right to control in an advantageous state as information on the advantageous section is not taken over after that, due to post-termination notification, Since the player can be made aware of this fact, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied or confused.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can terminate the advantageous section when either one of the termination condition 1 and the termination condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, the Advantageous interval data initialization processing for initializing information about the advantageous interval can be executed, and the advantageous interval ending condition 1 is that the number of games controlled to the advantageous interval (advantageous interval game number) reaches the prescribed number of games (this embodiment 1500 games), and the sub-control unit 91 determines that when the advantageous interval end condition 1 is satisfied and the advantageous interval ends, the game in which the advantageous interval ends has started. When the start switch 7 of the game is operated, that is, when the game start switch 7 is operated, it is possible to perform post-end notification to notify that the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval has reached the prescribed number of games.
According to this configuration, when the advantageous interval end condition 1 is established, that is, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval) reaches the specified number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), the game can be made to recognize that the advantageous section ends at .

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can terminate the advantageous section when either one of the termination condition 1 and the termination condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information about the advantageous section can be executed, and the termination condition 2 of the advantageous section is that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number (2388 in this embodiment). When the advantageous interval end condition 2 is satisfied and the advantageous interval ends, the sub-control unit 91 controls when the game in which the advantageous interval ends ends, that is, all When the reels are stopped and the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop of the game is finished, a post-end notification can be executed to notify that the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number. is.
According to this configuration, the advantageous section ends in the game when the advantageous section end condition 2 is established, that is, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number (2388 in this embodiment). can be recognized.

In this embodiment, condition 1 for ending the advantageous interval is established when the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches a specified number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). The configuration may be established when the number of games under control exceeds the number of games (for example, 1499 games) immediately before reaching the specified number of games. Similarly, condition 2 for ending the advantageous section is established when the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number (2388 in this embodiment). It may be a specified value (for example, 2389 sheets) or more.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can terminate the advantageous section when either one of the termination condition 1 and the termination condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Advantageous interval data initialization processing for initializing information on advantageous intervals can be executed, and game values owned by the player can be stored as credits in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the game is not played. It is configured to perform settlement control to settle the medals stored in the credit and return them to the player when the settlement operation is performed by the settlement switch 10 . In addition, the sub-control unit 91 is capable of performing post-end notification to notify that the information regarding the advantageous interval has been initialized. It is a configuration in which the post-end notification is terminated when the event is terminated.
According to this configuration, when the player ends the game, the post-end notification is terminated when the settlement control is performed. Therefore, the post-end notification continues even if the player changes. You can prevent it from slipping.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can terminate the advantageous section when either one of the termination condition 1 and the termination condition 2 is satisfied in the advantageous section. It is configured to be able to execute advantageous interval data initialization processing for initializing information on advantageous intervals, and the sub-control unit 91 can perform post-end notification to notify that information on advantageous intervals has been initialized. In the game where the advantageous section ends, post-end notification is started, and after the end of the game, the number of bets for starting the next game is not set, and a predetermined period (three minutes in this embodiment) has passed. This is a configuration for ending post-end notification.
According to this configuration, after the end of the game, the number of bets for starting the next game is not set, and the post-end notification is ended when the predetermined period elapses. It is possible to prevent the ex-post notification from continuing.

[Effect 4]
Some conventional slot machines are controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player, and when the number of games controlled to be in an advantageous state reaches a limit value of 1500 games, the advantageous state ends.

In a slot machine with such a configuration, although the advantageous state ends when the number of games controlled in an advantageous state reaches the limit value, even if the number of games controlled in an advantageous state does not reach the limit value, the situation is short-term. Advantageous situations may arise in the meantime, and it is not sufficient to prevent excessive advantages.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can control the advantageous interval that is advantageous to the player. End condition 1, which can be updated by counting the number of net additions, and is satisfied when the number of games in the advantage section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantage section, or the number of net addition medals in the advantage section exceeds a specified number (2388 in this embodiment), the advantageous section can be terminated when either one of the end conditions 2 is satisfied. Further, in the slot machine 1, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section reaches the prescribed number. A sub-control unit capable of executing a common advance notice of the end of an advantageous section to notify that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are about to be met at any time when the previous second predetermined value (2189 sheets in this embodiment) is reached. 91, the sub-control unit 91 provides information on the end condition 1 in the common advantageous interval end notice, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous interval as information on the end condition 2, and the number of medal net additions in the advantageous interval as information on the end condition 2 In this configuration, both of the remaining number of sheets up to the upper limit number of sheets are notified.
According to this configuration, the ending condition 1 is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals renewed in the advantageous interval exceeds the specified number. Even if one of the end conditions 2 is not met, the advantageous section ends when the other is met, so that it is possible to prevent excessive advantage due to being controlled to the advantageous section. In addition, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games, and when the number of net increase in medals reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the predetermined number, the advantage is reached. Since the common advance notice of the end of the advantageous section for notifying that the end condition of the section is about to be satisfied is executed, the end of the advantageous section can be notified in advance, and the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is executed. is established, and the advantageous section and the AT state are suddenly terminated. At this time, since the common advantageous section end notice includes both the information regarding the end condition 1 and the information concerning the end condition 2, even if the common advantageous section end notice, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section and the AT state are terminated by the establishment of the above.

In this embodiment, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval) reaches the upper limit number of games (first specified value), the advantageous interval end condition 1 is established. However, when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (first specified value), it is determined that condition 1 for ending the advantageous section is established, It may be configured to end the advantageous interval, or the number of games in the advantageous interval exceeds the value (first specified value - 1) immediately before reaching the upper limit number of games (first specified value), so that the advantageous interval end condition 1 is established, and the advantageous section may be ended. In addition, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the advantageous interval by determining that the advantageous interval end condition 2 is met when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous interval exceeds a specified number (second specified value). However, when the number of net additions in the advantageous zone reaches the number of cards that is one more than the specified number (second specified value + 1), or the number of cards exceeds the specified number by one, the end condition 2 of the advantageous zone is satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the advantageous section is terminated.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the advance notice of the end of the advantageous interval when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches a first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment). When the number of games reaches the first predetermined value or more, the advance notice of the end of the advantageous interval is executed, but when the number of games in the advantageous interval exceeds the value (1399 games) immediately before reaching the first predetermined value, it is advantageous. The configuration may be such that the section end notice is executed. Further, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute an advance notice of the end of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a second predetermined value (2188 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that the advantageous section end notice is executed when the number of cards reaches a second predetermined value or more, or the advantageous section end notice is executed when the net increase number in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value +1. .

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous interval that is advantageous to the player. and the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (in this embodiment, 1500 games). In the embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated when either one of the termination conditions 2, which is satisfied by exceeding 2388 sheets), is satisfied.
According to this configuration, the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, or the number of net increases in the number of medals increased during the advantageous interval exceeds the specified number and reaches the specified number + 1 or more. Since the section ends, it is possible to prevent excessive advantage from being controlled in the advantageous section.

When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the sub-control section 91 of the present embodiment determines that the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (in this embodiment, 2189 sheets) is reached before reaching , a common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the condition for ending the advantageous section is about to be satisfied can be executed. The advance notice of the end of the advantageous interval is the difference in the number of games in the advantageous interval until the end condition 1 is satisfied, that is, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous interval, and the number of medals net increase until the end condition 2 is satisfied. , i.e., the number of games remaining in the net increase in medals up to the prescribed number, can be recognized. , and the difference in the net increase in the number of medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied are updated.
According to this configuration, the remaining number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied and the remaining number of medal net additions until the end condition 2 are satisfied can be recognized in real time every time the remaining value changes. can be done.

When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the sub-control section 91 of the present embodiment determines that the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (in this embodiment, 2189 sheets) is reached before reaching , a common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the condition for ending the advantageous section is about to be satisfied can be executed. The advantageous interval end notice is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval (1500 games in this embodiment) when the advantageous interval ending condition 1 is satisfied, and when the advantageous interval ending condition 2 is satisfied. , and start when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a first predetermined value, or when the number of net increased medals in the advantageous section exceeds a second predetermined value. , that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is about to be satisfied or that the end condition 2 is about to be satisfied.
According to this configuration, the player is allowed to recognize the upper limit value of the number of games in the advantageous interval related to the advantageous interval ending condition 1 and the specified number of medal net increases in the advantageous interval related to the advantageous interval ending condition 2. In addition, it is possible to make the player recognize that the end condition 1 is about to be satisfied or the end condition 2 is about to be satisfied.

In addition, in the advance notice of the end of the advantageous section in this embodiment, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section when the advantageous section ending condition 1 is satisfied and the prescribed number of medal net increases when the advantageous section ending condition 2 is satisfied are set. Although it is configured to be notified in a identifiable manner, the prescribed number of games in the advantageous section (number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games) when the end condition 1 is satisfied, and the upper limit of the number of medals net increase when the end condition 2 is satisfied A configuration may be adopted in which the number of sheets is notified in a identifiable manner. In such a configuration, the player is made aware of the specified number of games in the advantageous interval game number related to the advantageous interval ending condition 1 and the upper limit of the number of medal net increases in the advantageous interval related to the advantageous interval ending condition 2. At the same time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the end condition 1 is about to be satisfied or the end condition 2 is about to be satisfied.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment defines the ending condition 1 that is established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), or the number of medals net increase in the advantageous section. When one of the end conditions 2, which is established by exceeding the number of sheets (2388 in this embodiment), is met, the advantageous interval can be ended, and the sub-control unit 91 controls the advantageous interval game When the number reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, the second predetermined value (this embodiment Then, 2189 sheets), it is a configuration that can execute a common advantageous section end notice that informs that the condition for ending the advantageous section is about to be satisfied. A predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, the game state being controlled in the game is non-internal) as an end condition 3 that can be satisfied before the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 are satisfied. is established, it is possible to end the advantageous interval, and the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, or the medal When the net increase number exceeds the second predetermined value (2188 sheets in this embodiment) before exceeding the specified number, the termination condition 3 is not satisfied until the termination condition 1 or the termination condition 2 is satisfied.
According to this configuration, after the advantageous interval end notice is executed by the number of games in the advantageous interval reaching the first predetermined value or the number of medal net increases exceeding the second predetermined value, the end condition 1 is satisfied. Since the advantageous section continues until the end condition 2 is satisfied or the end condition 2 is satisfied, the player can be given a sense of security.

[Effect 5]
As a conventional slot machine, it is controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value of 1500 games, the advantageous state is terminated and the advantageous state is reached. There is a configuration in which information related to control of an advantageous state, such as the number of remaining games, is also initialized.

In such a slot machine, when the number of games controlled to be in an advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state is ended, and information related to control of the advantageous state such as the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is also provided. Although it will be initialized, if it is confirmed that the limit value will be reached by adding the number of remaining games in the advantageous state in the middle of the advantageous state, when the added result is notified, Despite the fact that the advantageous state ends when the limit value is reached, there is a risk of misunderstanding that the advantageous state will continue.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control section 41 and a sub-control section 91, and the main control section 41 can control the game section to be an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. , an advantageous zone game number counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous zone, and a net increase number counter for counting the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone game number counter is the upper limit number of games. and when the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of sheets, the advantageous section is terminated when the end condition is satisfied, and the AT given in the advantageous section is satisfied. It is possible to control to an AT state that is advantageous to the advantageous player for a period corresponding to the number of games, and to control to an additional state in which the number of AT games is awarded. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 can use the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the total number of AT games given in the added state at the end of the added state. As a result of giving the number of AT games, when the additional state ends without confirming that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, the additional state result is notified. On the other hand, as a result of the number of AT games being awarded in the additional state, it is confirmed that at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number is established. It is configured not to execute the addition state result notification when it is decided to do so.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being awarded in the additional state, the additional number of games is added without confirming either that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or that the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games. When the state ends, an additional state result notification is executed to notify the total number of AT games given in the additional state, and as a result of the AT game number given in the additional state, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game. When it is determined that at least one of reaching the number and that the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of sheets is established, the addition state result notification is not executed, so the addition state result notification is executed. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the AT state continues even after the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and after the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number.

In this embodiment, one or more AT games are always given in the added state, but the configuration may be such that if the AT game is given in the added state, it may not be given. In addition, in the added state, at least one of the probability of giving AT games and the expected value of the number of AT games to be given may be higher than when not controlled in the added state. .

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can give the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the AT state (normal) and the additional state, and the number of advantageous section games is the upper limit number of games. or that the number of medals added in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number (condition for ending the advantageous section), the advantageous section ends and the AT state ends. In addition, at least one of the number of games in the advantageous section reaching a first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games, and the number of medal net additions in the advantageous section exceeding a second predetermined value before exceeding the predetermined number. (ED control start condition) is satisfied, after that, it is possible to start ED control that continues the AT state over the period until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the number of AT games is As a result of granting, the conditions for starting the ED control are satisfied, so that a sufficient number of AT games are granted, and it may be determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. , By giving the number of AT games, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, so that a sufficient number of AT games are given, and even if ED control is not performed, the advantageous section Although it is a configuration in which it may be determined that the end condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied due to the configuration in which the ED control is not performed, that is, the number of AT games is given. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied only when a sufficient number of AT games are given to the player.

Thus, even if the main control unit 41 does not perform the ED control, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied as a result of the AT game number being given in the added state. On the other hand, when the number of AT games is given in the added state, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the added state result is notified. is not executed, the AT state continues even after the termination condition of the advantageous section is established by executing the addition state result notification, similar to the configuration of the present embodiment, that is, the configuration in which the main control unit 41 performs ED control. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment determines that at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number as a result of the AT game number being awarded in the additional state. The AT state is continued until at least one of the fact that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games is established when it is determined that the game will be established. After performing the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect that suggests that the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number The AT state effect (ED determination) and the ED effect are performed using a background image specific to the period until one is established.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being given in the additional state, at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number of games is established. When it is determined, the AT state is established until at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number by the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect. It is suggested that it will be continued, and after that, it is unique to the period until either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number Since the AT state effect (ED confirmed) and the ED effect are executed using the background image, the ED transition confirmation effect and the subsequent AT state effect (ED confirmed) and ED effect cause the advantageous section game number counter to reach the upper limit game. It is possible to clearly recognize that the AT state continues until at least one of reaching the number or exceeding the specified number of sheets by the net increase number counter is established, and that the AT state ends at that point.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an additional state, and the additional state includes a plurality of additional states A to C with different expected values for the number of AT games to be given, and sub-control Even if the main control unit 41 side is controlled to any type of additional state, the unit 91, as a result of the AT game number being given in the additional state, the advantageous section game number counter is set to the upper limit game number. When it is determined that at least one of reaching the , and that the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, an ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, and any type of addition state is controlled. Even if it is, after the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, until either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number is established It is a configuration that executes the AT state effect (ED determination) over the period of.
According to this configuration, regardless of which type of addition state is controlled, at least the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number in a common flow. It is possible to recognize that the AT state ends when one of them is established.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an additional state, and the additional state includes a plurality of additional states A to C with different expected values for the number of AT games to be given, and sub-control When the main control unit 41 side controls the addition state, the unit 91 is capable of performing different effects in accordance with the controlled addition states A to C, and the main control unit 41 No matter what type of extra state is controlled on the side, as a result of the AT game number being given in that extra state, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number and the net increase number counter When it is determined that at least one of exceeding the specified number of sheets is established, the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, and even if it is controlled to any type of addition state, After the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, the AT state effect (ED confirmation) is executed.
According to this configuration, regardless of which type of addition state is controlled, at least the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number in a common flow. It is possible to recognize that the AT state ends when one of them is established.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an added state. It is a configuration that includes multiple types of addition states A to C with different expected values for the number of AT games to be given, but in the added state, at least one of the expected value for the number of AT games to be given or the production mode. A configuration including an overlaid state may also be used.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment can control the main control unit 41 to be in an additional state, and in the additional state, a plurality of additional additions with different expected values of the production mode and the number of AT games to be given Including states A to C, the sub control unit 91 is configured to be able to execute the AT state effect in the AT state, and when the sub control unit 91 is controlled by the main control unit 41 to the additional state As a result of the number of AT games being given to the number of games, the additional state without confirming that at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number After the addition state result notification is executed when is ended, the AT state performance (normal) is executed using a common normal background regardless of the type of the ended addition state.
According to this configuration, the common AT state effect (normal) is executed after the completion of control regardless of which kind of additional state is controlled. can be easily recognized.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to display on the liquid crystal display 51 an AT game number display indicating the remaining number of AT games in the AT state, and performs an ED transition confirmation indication effect. When there is, the AT game number display is not displayed, and the AT game number display is displayed at the timing of starting the AT state production (ED confirmation).
According to this configuration, since the number of AT games is not displayed and the remaining number of AT games is not displayed when the ED transition confirmation suggestion effect is performed, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and net increase. It is possible to direct the player's attention to an AT state effect (ED confirmation) suggesting that the AT state will continue until at least one of the number counter exceeds the prescribed number is established.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the control state regarding AT to the AT state and the additional state. As a result of the AT game number being given in the added state, the sub-control unit 91 detects that the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number and that the net increase number counter reaches the specified number Even when it is determined that at least one of the above will be established, as a result of the number of AT games being awarded in the AT state, the advantageous section game number counter will reach the upper limit number of games and the number of net additions Even when it is determined that at least one of the counter exceeding the specified number of sheets is established, control is performed so that the ED transition determination suggestion performance is performed. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 determines that at least one of the fact that the advantageous zone game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games as a result of the AT game number being given in the additional state is established. Even when it is decided that the number of AT games is given in the AT state, at least the number of advantageous section games counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number Even when it is confirmed that either one of them will be established, after the ED transition confirmation indication effect is performed, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number. The AT state effect (ED confirmation) is executed until at least one of the above is established.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being awarded in the additional state, at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number of games is established. Even when is decided, as a result of the number of AT games being awarded in the AT state, at least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number At least one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number of games is established even when it is determined that one of them will be established. A common flow can be used to recognize that a state ends.

In the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the AT game number display indicating the remaining AT game number, thereby displaying the remaining AT game number. In the add-on state, the number of AT games is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the remaining number of AT games is not displayed.
According to this configuration, the number of AT games is not displayed and the remaining number of AT games is not displayed in the additional state in which the number of AT games may be awarded. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to display on the liquid crystal display 51 the number of AT games indicating the remaining number of AT games in the AT state, and the advantageous section game number counter is the upper limit game. If at least one of reaching the number and exceeding the specified number of sheets in the net increase number counter is not established, an end suggestion notification suggesting the end of the AT state before the end of the AT state to indicate the end of the AT state using the display of the remaining number of AT games by the display of the number of AT games, the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games, and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number If it is confirmed that at least one of the above is established, the number of AT games is increased by giving an advance notice of the end suggesting the end of the advantageous section and the AT state before the end of the advantageous section and the AT state. It is configured to suggest the end of the AT state by using an end pre-indication image of end pre-notification as another display without using the display of the remaining number of AT games by display.
According to this configuration, when the AT state is terminated by at least one of the advantageous interval game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number of games, the advantageous interval game number is terminated. Remaining number of AT games indicated by the number of AT games, such as when the AT state ends without at least one of the number of games counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number of games Since the end of the AT state is suggested using another display instead of using the numerical display, it is possible to suggest the end of the AT state without inadvertently stirring up the player.

After confirming that at least one of the advantageous zone game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number of games in the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment A configuration in which an AT state effect (ED confirmation) peculiar to that period is executed until either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number is established. In the AT state production (ED confirmation), it is confirmed that either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, and the advantageous section It is configured to notify the remaining number of games until the game number counter value reaches the upper limit number of games and the remaining number of games until the net increase number counter value exceeds the specified number.
According to this configuration, when it is determined that either the advantageous interval game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games, that fact and the advantageous interval game number are confirmed. The player can be made aware of the remaining number of games until the counter value reaches the upper limit number of games and the number of remaining games until the net increase number counter value exceeds the specified number.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes AT state result notification to notify the result of the AT state (in the present embodiment, the total number of medals paid out in the AT state, the number of games in the AT state) when the AT state ends. When the advantageous section game number counter value reaches the first predetermined number before reaching the upper limit number of games, and when the net increase number counter value exceeds the second predetermined value before exceeding the predetermined number, it is advantageous. Notifying that conditions for ending the section and the AT state are about to be met, and executing pre-end notification suggesting the end of the AT state, games in which the advantageous section game number counter value has reached the upper limit number of games, and the net increase number counter. In a game in which the value exceeds the specified number of games, it is possible to perform a post-completion notification to notify that the advantageous section game number counter value has reached the upper limit number of games and that the net increase number counter value has exceeded the specified number of games, In this configuration, the post-end notification is continued even during the period when the AT state result notification is being performed.
According to this configuration, when at least one of the advantageous interval game number counter value reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter value exceeding the specified number of games is established, the advantageous interval ends and the AT The player can be made to effectively recognize that the state has ended by means of pre-end notification and post-end notification.

In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs post-end notification to notify that the advantage zone game number counter value has reached the upper limit number of games and that the net increase number counter value has exceeded the specified number of games, and the AT state result Even after the notification is terminated, it is configured to continue for a period until the predetermined number of games has elapsed. For example, even if the post-end notification is also terminated when the AT state result notification is terminated, the player can be effectively recognized by the pre-end notification and the post-end notification.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes AT state result notification to notify the result of the AT state (in this embodiment, the total number of medals paid out in the AT state, the number of games in the AT state) when the AT state ends. During the execution of the AT state result notification, immersion prevention notification is performed to encourage immersion prevention, and after that, when a predetermined time elapses, the immersion prevention notification is terminated, while the predetermined time elapses. It is a configuration for controlling so as to continue the post-end notification even if it ends.
According to this configuration, the addiction prevention notification ends when the predetermined time elapses, while the post-end notification continues even after the predetermined time elapses, so that the advantageous interval game number counter value reaches the upper limit number of games. It is possible to effectively make the player recognize that the advantageous section has ended and the AT state has ended due to the fact that the net increase number counter value has exceeded the specified number.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player. The navigation effect includes a first mode and a second mode. or that the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number, the navigation effect may be performed in the first mode or the navigation effect in the second mode. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that either the advantage zone game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games, the first mode is applied. However, in the second mode, the navigation effect is not performed.
According to this configuration, the navigation effect is set to the first mode before it is established that either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games. It is possible to suggest the possibility of shifting to an additional state by selectively using whether to carry out in the second mode or to carry out in the second mode.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to carry out a navigation effect that suggests an operation mode that is to The sub-control unit 91 determines that either the advantageous interval game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games in the AT state. If it has not been determined, the navigation effect may be performed in the first mode or may be performed in the second mode. exceeds the specified number, the navigation effect may be performed in the first mode, but the navigation effect is not performed in the second mode. .
According to this configuration, the number of AT games is added before it is established that either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number of games is established. In the case where the AT state is extended by being pulled, the navigation effect is performed in the second mode, and while it is possible to expect that an addition will be performed, the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit number of games. or the net increase number counter exceeds the prescribed number, i.e., when the AT state is not extended, the navigation effect is not performed in the second mode. In this way, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that there is a possibility that an addition will be made.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that either the advantageous section game number counter reaches the upper limit game number or the net increase number counter exceeds the specified number as a result of the AT game number being given in the additional state. When it is determined that the condition will be established, even if the conditions for ending the condition (in this embodiment, a predetermined number of games are played) are not established, the condition is terminated.
According to this configuration, as a result of the number of AT games being awarded in the additional state, either one of the advantageous section game number counter reaching the upper limit number of games and the net increase number counter exceeding the specified number of games can be established. In spite of the determination, the added state does not continue uselessly.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the bet amount is set using medals and credits as game values. It may be applied to a machine or a full-credit slot machine in which only credits are used as gaming value to set the bet amount. When game balls are used as game values, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. Equivalent to setting a bet using

Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to using only one of multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls. For example, multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. can be That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and when a winning occurs, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be played. A slot machine that can pay out any utility value may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modification, an example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game balls are shot into the game area. It can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine in which a game is played by playing.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 12 game auxiliary display 12a section display LED
41 main control unit 91 sub control unit

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information that can be individually identified,
A slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section;
Numeric value update means for updating a specific numeric value in the advantageous section;
Advantageous section termination means for terminating the advantageous section when a termination condition is satisfied when the specific numerical value reaches a specified number;
Advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state over a period corresponding to the advantageous amount in the advantageous section;
a specific state control means capable of controlling a specific state for increasing the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
specific result notification means capable of executing specific result notification for notifying the increased advantageous amount in the specific state when the specific state ends;
Advantageous amount increasing means for increasing the advantageous amount in the advantageous state;
When it is decided that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number as a result of an increase in the advantageous amount, a specification that suggests that the advantageous state will continue until the specified numerical value reaches the specified number. a specific reporting means for reporting;
After the specific notification is made, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect during the period until the specific numerical value reaches a specified number;
with
The specific result notifying means is
As a result of an increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, when the specific state ends without it being confirmed that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number, the specific result notification is performed;
When it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific result notification is not executed,
Also when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a specified number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the specific notifying means is configured to increase the advantageous amount by the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state. Also when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number as a result of the increase in the amount, the specific notification is performed,
The specific effect executing means, even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches a prescribed number as a result of the increase in the advantageous amount in the specific state, the advantageous amount increasing means in the advantageous state As a result of the increase in the advantageous amount, even when it is determined that the specific numerical value reaches the specified number, after the specific notification is made, the time until the specific numerical value reaches the specified number A slot machine that executes the specified performance for a period of time.

Images